AMX NXD CV7 User Manual

instruction manual  
NXD-CV7 and NXT-CV7  
7" Modero Widescreen Video Touch Panels  
(Firmware version G4)  
Touch Panels and Accessories  
FCC Information  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received; including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can  
radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment  
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or  
transmitter. This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an  
uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed an operated with a minimum  
distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body.  
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
i
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Table of Contents  
ii  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Table of Contents  
iii  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Table of Contents  
iv  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Introduction  
Introduction  
The NXT/D-CV7 7" Modero Widescreen Color Video Touch Panels (FIG. 1) are the industry’s first  
widescreen mini-touch panels and are available only through AMX.  
NXD-CV7 (front view)  
NXT-CV7 (front view)  
(FG2258-02)  
(FG2258-01)  
FIG. 1 Sample 7" Video Touch Panels  
These Color Video (CV) panels display NTSC/PAL/SECAM video formats within variable sized  
windows. They include a built-in microphone, speakers, audio/headphone connector, and six  
NetLinx programmable pushbuttons (available on NXD models only when mounted with included  
Button Trim Ring).  
Table Top models use AMX's exclusive SmoothTilt™ technology for effortless adjustment of the  
viewing angle.  
Each panel is sold only as part of a CV7 Kit which includes both a panel and an  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Audio/Video Breakout Box (FG2254-10). This box facilitates the  
installation and distribution of video (either Composite or S-Video), data (via Ethernet), and audio  
to Modero touch panels located up to 200 feet (60.96 m) from the breakout box. CV7 panels are  
ideally suited for displaying full motion video and audio with overlay graphics for applications with  
demanding visual requirements.  
CV7 7" Widescreen Video Touch Panel Kits  
NXD-CV7  
7" Widescreen Color Video Wall Mount Touch Panel Kit (with buttons)  
(FG2258-02K)  
(includes both an NXD panel and an NXA-AVB/ETHERNET A/V Breakout Box).  
NXT-CV7  
7" Widescreen Color Video Table Top Touch Panel Kit (without buttons)  
(FG2258-01K)  
(includes both an NXT panel and an NXA-AVB/ETHERNET A/V Breakout Box).  
The NXD-CV7 panel (FG2258-02) is shipped, by default with a Trim Ring containing  
buttons, but the end user can later install the included Trim Ring without button  
openings.  
NXT panels can not be upgraded by simply replacing a Trim Ring on the Faceplate.  
1
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Introduction  
Key features common to both panels include:  
CV7 panels are based on the latest display technology and support AMX's 4th generation  
(G4) graphics which provide higher brightness, richer colors, and deeper contrast. The  
new G4 graphics technology is supported by the latest AMX TPDesign4 Touch Panel  
Design program (version 2.5 or higher).  
CV7 panels display eye-catching images and full-motion video on a large 16:9 image  
format, while providing a wide 100-degree top-to-bottom viewing angle.  
CV7 panels feature a front panel light sensor, motion sensor, IR receiver and a  
Sleep/Setup Access combo button.  
CV7 panels support AMX Computer Control, which enables remote viewing and control  
of any networked computer directly from the panel. This gives the user the ability to  
launch digital music from a PC, cruise the Internet, check and respond to  
E-mail, open software files, and launch applications. Anything you can do on your PC  
can be accomplished through these panels.  
The optional wireless solution includes an NXA-WC80211B/CF internal wireless  
interface card that allows the CV7 to communicate with a NetLinx Master via a standard  
802.11b Wireless Access Point, and an NXA-BASE/1 battery base kit that allows the  
NXT to function off the charge from the included single NXT-BP battery.  
CV7 panels feature programmable firmware that can be upgraded via either the Ethernet  
port, wireless interface card, or the mini-USB port.  
NXT-CV7  
NXD-CV7 (shown with Button Trim Ring installed)  
base  
Sleep/Setup Access Button  
Programmable  
Buttons/LEDs  
(1-3)  
Programmable  
Buttons/LED  
(4-6)  
Sleep/Setup Access Button  
FIG. 2 NXT-CV7 and NXD-CV7 (front views)  
The Button Trim Ring is factory installed only on the FG2259-02 and FG2259-03  
panel models.  
2
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Introduction  
CV7 Specifications  
The following table outlines the specifications for the 7" Widescreen Modero panels.  
Specifications for 7" Widescreen Video Touch Panels  
Dimensions (HWD):  
• NXA-RK7: metal rack-mount with black matte finish:  
(4 RU - rack units high)  
6.97" x 19.0" x 0.50" (17.70 cm x 48.26 cm x 1.27 cm)  
• NXT-CV7 (Fully raised): 6.86" x 7.96" x 6.93"  
(17.40 cm x 20.20 cm x 17.60 cm)  
• NXT-CV7 (Fully lowered): 3.70" x 7.96" x 6.93"  
(9.40 cm x 20.20 cm x 17.60 cm)  
• NXD-CV7 (with faceplate): 5.93" x 7.87" x 3.28"  
(15.06 cm x 20.00 cm x 8.33 cm)  
• CB-TP7 Conduit/Wallbox (optional): 5.47" x 7.23" x 3.40"  
(13.90 cm x 18.40 cm x 8.64 cm)  
Power Requirements  
(stand-alone CV7):  
• Constant current draw: 1.0 A @ 12 VDC (stand-alone)  
• Startup current draw: 1.5 A @ 12 VDC (stand-alone)  
• Constant current draw: 2.4 A @ 12 VDC  
Power Requirements  
(CV7 and BASE/1):  
• Startup current draw: 3.6 A @ 12 VDC  
Minimum power supply  
required:  
• PSN2.8 Power Supply (FG423-17)  
- when used with a stand-alone CV7 unit.  
• PSN4.4 Power Supply (FG423-45)  
- when a CV7 is connected to a BASE/1. Using accessories can increase  
the power draw requirements.  
Memory (factory default):  
Weight (stand-alone):  
Panel LCD Parameters:  
• 64 MB SDRAM  
• 64 MB Compact Flash (upgradeable to 1 GB - factory programmed)  
• NXD-CV7: 4.12 lbs (1.87 kg)  
• NXTCV7: 4.12 lbs (1.87 kg)  
• Aspect ratio: 16 x 9  
• Brightness (luminance): 350 cd/m2  
• Channel transparency: 8-bit Alpha blending  
• Contrast ratio: 200:1  
• Display colors: 256 thousand colors (18-bit color depth)  
• Dot/pixel pitch: 0.19 mm  
• Panel type: TFT Color Active-Matrix  
• Screen resolution: 800 x 480 pixels (HV) @ 60 Hz frame frequency  
• Video format: NTSC, PAL, and SECAM  
• Viewing angle (100° total viewing angle):  
Horizontal: + 50° (left and right from center)  
Vertical: + 55° (up from center) and - 45° (down from center)  
IR Reception Angle:  
• Horizontal: + 50° (left and right from center)  
• Vertical: + 30° (up and down from center)  
Supported Audio Sample  
Rates:  
48000Hz, 44100Hz, 32000Hz, 24000Hz, 22050Hz, 16000Hz, 12000Hz,  
11025Hz, and 8000Hz.  
Certifications:  
• FCC, CE, and EN 60950  
3
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Introduction  
Specifications for 7" Widescreen Video Touch Panels (Cont.)  
Front Panel Components:  
Light sensor:  
• Photosensitive light detector for automatic adjustment of the panel brightness  
(a dim room results in a dimmer LCD display, and a bright room results in a  
brighter LCD display).  
Note: The light sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup page (page 101).  
Motion sensor (PIR):  
• Proximity Infrared Detector to wake the panel when the panel is approached.  
• Activation range: + 45° (left and right from center) and + 20° (up and down  
from center).  
Note: This sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup page (see page 101).  
IR Receiver:  
• IR reception 38 KHz and 455 KHz IR frequencies.  
• The IR receiver is located beneath the translucent Front Setup button. When  
an IR code is detected it is sent to the NetLinx Master as a push on the  
appropriate AMX IR channel.  
• IR receivers and transmitters on G4 panels share the device address number  
of the panel.  
Front setup access button: • Provides both access to the Setup and Calibration page and toggles the  
panel between a "sleep" or "wake" state.  
- When wired, "sleep" status means the backlight is Off.  
- When battery operated, wireless "sleep" status means the touch panel  
base is either Off or "suspended".  
Microphone:  
• Used for intercom applications  
(requires the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box for analog  
communication)  
Speakers:  
• Stereo output with a frequency response of 500 Hz - 7 KHz  
LEDs (NXD panels only):  
• 6 blue LEDs (support On and Off)  
- Both the LEDs and pushbuttons are only available when using the default  
Button Trim Ring on the NXD panel.  
Buttons (NXD panels only): • 6 programmable pushbuttons  
Rear Panel Components:  
(Side panel location on NXD-Wall Mount panels)  
Mini-USB connector:  
• 5-pin Mini-USB connector used for programming, firmware update, and touch  
panel file transfer between the PC and the target panel.  
Note: When connecting the panel to PC using a CC-USB (or compatible)  
cable, be sure to power the panel On before attempting to connect the USB  
cable from the PC to the mini-USB port on the panel. Refer to the Configuring  
information.  
Stereo Output connector:  
Ethernet 10/100 port:  
• Stereo output through a 3.5mm mini-jack (for use with external speakers or  
headphones).  
• RJ-45 port for 10/100 Mbps communication. The Ethernet port automatically  
negotiates the connection speed (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps), and whether to use  
half duplex or full duplex mode.  
• CV7 panels communicate with the NetLinx Master using the ICSP protocol  
over Ethernet.  
Ethernet 10/100 LEDs:  
USB connector:  
• LEDs show communication activity and connection information:  
A-activity - Yellow LED lights when receiving or transmitting Ethernet data  
packets.  
L-link - Green LED lights when the Ethernet cables are connected and  
terminated correctly.  
Type-A USB port can connect an external keyboard or mouse device for use  
with Virtual PC applications.  
Note: External USB input devices (keyboard or mouse) must be plugged into  
the rear/side USB connector before the unit is powered-up. The panel will not  
detect these USB input devices until the unit cycles power.  
4
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Introduction  
Specifications for 7" Widescreen Video Touch Panels (Cont.)  
Rear Panel Components  
(Cont.):  
(Side panel location on NXD-Wall Mount panels)  
Audio/Video connector:  
• RJ-45 connector for communication of differential audio/video signals  
to/from the touch panel (panel type dependant). This connector receives  
Composite video, Stereo (left/right) audio, and microphone audio.  
• Video is received via the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box. Configuring  
video windows for playback is done using TPDesign4.  
• In-bound audio (from the breakout box) gets directed to the speakers.  
• Out-bound audio is sent from the on-board microphone (on the  
front-panel). Selecting audio files for playback is configured through  
TPDesign4.  
PWR connector:  
• 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector.  
Button Assignments  
(NXD-CV7 only):  
Button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels.  
• Button channel range: 1 - 4000 button push and feedback (per address port)  
• Button variable text range: 1 - 4000 (per address port)  
• Button states range: 1 - 256 (General Button; 1 = Off State, 2 = On State)  
• Level range: 1 - 600 (default level value 0-255, can be set up to 1-65535)  
• Address port range: 1 - 100  
Operating / Storage  
Environment:  
• Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)  
• Operating Humidity: 20% - 85% RH  
• Storage Temperature: -20° C (-4° F) to 60° C (140° F)  
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH  
Included Accessories:  
Trim Ring with button openings (60-2258-16)  
(factory installed on NXD models only)  
Trim Ring without button openings (60-2258-21) (NXD models only)  
• Installation Kit for 7" NXD panels (KA2258-02) includes:  
- One 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector (41-5025)  
- Two Phillips-head screws (#4-40 x 0.250 Black) (80-0112)  
- Three Drywall clips (62-5924-05) and #6 -metal strips (80-0192)  
• Installation Kit for 7" NXT panels (KA2258-01):  
- 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector (41-5025)  
• Modero Table Top Cable (CA2250-50): provided with all NXT panels.  
• NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box (FG2254-10): Provides video/audio  
distribution to the A/V panel over CAT5 cable (up to 200’/60.96m) and  
accepts either Composite or S-Video.  
- Although the CV7 is only sold as part of a KIT configuration, the breakout  
box can be purchased as a separate accessory.  
Optional Accessories:  
• CB-TP7 (FG035-10)  
- 7" metallic conduit box for Wall Mount installations.  
• CC-USB (Type A) to Mini-B 5-Wire programming cable (FG10-5965)  
• NXA-BASE/1 Battery Base Kit (FG2255-05K)  
- 1 battery base and 1 NXT-BP battery (NXT panels only)  
• NXA-RK7 (FG2904-53)  
- RackMount kit for 7" Wall Mount touch panels (NXD panels only).  
Kit includes eight #10-32 screws and washers.  
• NXA-WC80211B/CF (FG2255-03)  
- AMX 802.11B Compact Flash Wireless Network Card  
5
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Introduction  
Specifications for 7" Widescreen Video Touch Panels (Cont.)  
Optional Accessories::  
• NXT-BP (FG2255-10)  
- Battery pack for Table Top panels.  
• NXT-CHG Kit (FG2250-50K)  
- 1 battery charger and 2 NXT-BP batteries  
• PSN2.8: Power Supply (FG423-17) with 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector  
• PSN4.4: Power Supply (FG423-45) with 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector  
• PSN6.5: Power Supply (FG423-41) with 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector  
Upgrade Compact Flash (factory programmed with firmware):  
NXA-CFSP128M - 128 MB Compact Flash card (FG2116-36)  
NXA-CFSP256M - 256 MB Compact Flash card (FG2116-37)  
NXA-CFSP512M - 512 MB Compact Flash card (FG2116-38)  
NXA-CFSP1G - 1 GB Compact Flash card (FG2116-39)  
It is recommended that firmware KIT files only be transferred over a direct USB  
or Ethernet connection and only when the panel is connected to a power  
supply. If battery power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade,  
the panel flash file system may become corrupted.  
CV7 Panels - Connector Layout  
FIG. 3 shows the layout of the connectors (located on the rear of the base on the NXT and on the  
left side panel of the NXD panels).  
Ethernet (CAT5)  
Keyboard/Mouse  
(USB)  
Audio-Video from  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET (CAT5)  
Stereo Output  
A
L
12VDC  
Mini-USB  
(Program)  
Power  
ETHERNET  
10/100  
PROGRAM  
KEYBOARD /  
MOUSE  
PWR  
AUDIO / VIDEO  
NXT-CV7 - connectors located  
on rear panel of the base  
NXD-CV7 - connectors located  
on left side panel  
FIG. 3 Connector layout on the CV7 touch panels  
6
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
The following section outlines and describes the CV7 accessories (both the included and optional).  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box (FG2254-10)  
The NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box (FIG. 4) is included as part of the CV7 Kit  
configuration (panel and box) but can be purchased as a separate accessory. This box facilitates the  
installation and distribution of video, data, and audio to Modero touch panels located up to 200 feet  
(60.96 m) from the AVB box. This unit accepts either Composite or S-Video from standard video  
devices.  
This breakout box can be mounted on either a horizontal flat surface or within an equipment rack  
(by using an optional AC-RK Rack Kit).  
Composite/  
S-Video  
Luma  
Ethernet (to panel)  
S-Video Chroma  
Power In  
(rear)  
(front)  
Audio  
In  
Audio/Video  
(to panel)  
Ethernet In  
Mic Out  
Power (to panel)  
FIG. 4 NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box (front and rear views)  
Product Specifications  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Specifications  
Dimensions (HWD):  
• 1.50" x 5.55" x 4.88" (3.81 cm x 14.10 cm x 12.40 cm)  
• Width when attached to mounting ears: 6.65" (16.89 cm)  
• 50mA (with audio/video input)  
Power Consumption:  
• 23mA (with no audio/video)  
• Routed through NXA-AVB/Ethernet using a PSN6.5 power supply  
• FCC, CE, and EN 60950  
Certifications:  
Features:  
• Accepts either Composite or S-Video (video-capable panels only)  
• Provides audio distribution to the non-video touch panels over a CAT5 cable  
(up to 200 ft.)  
• Provides video/audio distribution to the video-capable touch panels over  
CAT5 cable up to 200 ft.(60.9 m)  
Availability:  
• This unit is included with CV7 and 1200V-Series Video Kits  
• 2-pin 3.5 mm Phoenix connector for power to the touch panel  
• Green LED provides an indication of power status  
Front Components:  
• RJ-45 connector provides Ethernet signals to the touch panel  
• RJ-45 connector provides differential audio and video signals to the touch  
panel (panel type dependant)  
7
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
       
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Specifications (Cont.)  
Rear Components:  
• 6-pin 3.5 mm Phoenix connector for in-bound (left/right channel) audio  
• 4-pin 3.5 mm Phoenix connector for out-bound (from microphone) audio  
• BNC connector (female) for Composite or Chroma (for video-capable  
panels only)  
• BNC connector (female) for luminance (for video-capable panels only)  
• RJ-45 connector for Ethernet input from the control system  
• 2-pin 3.5 mm Phoenix connector for in-bound power  
Two 2-pin Phoenix connectors (41-5025)  
Included Accessories:  
Optional Accessories:  
• 4-pin Phoenix connector (41-5047)  
• 6-pin Phoenix connector (41-5063)  
• Rack Mount Kit (KA2250-40) with mounting bracket (62-2254-02)  
• AC-RK Accessory RackMount Kit (FG515)  
• Modero Table Top Cable (CA2250-50)  
• PSN4.4 power supply (FG423-45) (panel dependant)  
• PSN6.5 power supply (FG423-41) (panel dependant)  
Installing the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET  
A PSN power supply can indirectly provide power to a Modero panel by routing power through the  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box. FIG. 5 shows a sample wiring configuration using both an  
indirect or direct PSN power connection for a video-capable Modero panel.  
Indirect  
Connect  
Line Level out  
(to amplifier  
or VOL card)  
Mic Out  
Ethernet In  
(RJ-45)  
(4-pin captive-wire)  
PSN power  
supply  
Video In  
(BNC)  
Audio In  
(6-pin captive-wire)  
(rear)  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET  
Breakout Box  
PSN  
supplied via  
(front)  
NXA-AVB box  
Ethernet  
(CAT5)  
Audio/Video  
(CAT5)  
PSN power  
supply  
or  
Direct  
Connect  
NXD/T Video-capable  
Touch Panels  
FIG. 5 Sample wiring configuration on video-capable panels using this breakout box  
A PSN power supply can also directly provide power through the unit to a target Modero panel.  
FIG. 6 shows a sample wiring configuration for a non-video capable Modero panel.  
8
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Direct  
connect  
Ethernet  
(CAT5)  
Audio (CAT5)  
between the  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET  
Breakout Box  
PSN power  
supply  
NXD/T Non-video capable  
Touch Panels  
FIG. 6 Sample wiring configuration using CA Modero panels  
The breakout box unit can be mounted on either a horizontal flat surface or into an  
equipment rack (by removing the front screws and attaching it to an optional AC-RK).  
The PSN power supply being used on the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET is dependant on the  
power requirements of the target touch panel.  
Use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable to provide both communication and 10/100 network  
connectivity between the panel, NXA-AVB/ETHERNET, NetLinx Master, and the network.  
Wiring the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET connectors and cables  
The inputs and outputs on the breakout box are separated into front and rear connectors. The rear  
connectors are used to input external signals. The front connectors are used to communicate signals  
between the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET and a target Modero panel. FIG. 7 provides a layout of the  
wiring connection both into and from the breakout box.  
GND  
F
R
O
N
T
Audio In - Left Channel  
In (-)  
(6-pin captive wire)  
In (+)  
GND  
In (-)  
Audio In - Right Channel  
(6-pin captive wire)  
In (+)  
GND(-)  
Out (-)  
Microphone Out  
Out (+)  
(4-pin captive wire)  
Comp/Y (BNC)  
C (BNC)  
Audio/Video  
(CAT5)  
Ethernet  
(RJ-45)  
Ethernet Out  
(CAT5)  
R
E
A
R
Power to  
touch panel  
PSN power  
supply  
FIG. 7 NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box connector wiring diagram  
The rear-panel wiring connections are described below (from left to right):  
• AUDIO IN:  
6-pin mini-Phoenix connector, divided into left and right audio channels. Each  
channel is divided into GND, IN+, and IN- terminal cable connectors (2 sets of  
3 for each channel).  
An example of this cable is to strip the ends of 2 RCA audio cables and insert  
them into their respective locations on the Audio In port.  
Either a balanced (+, -, and GND) or unbalanced (+ and GND) audio  
signal can be connected to this input.  
9
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
• MIC OUT:  
4-pin mini-Phoenix connector, divided into GND, OUT-, and OUT+ terminal  
connectors.  
An example of this cable is to strip the terminal ends of a 3.5mm mini-jack and  
insert them into their respective locations on the Mic Out port. This signal can  
be fed as a Line Level In to either an amplifier or an AMX VOL card.  
Either a balanced (+, -, and GND) or unbalanced (+ and GND) audio signal  
can be connected to this output.  
• Video In BNCs: Feeds either Composite/S-Video Luma or S-Video Chroma signals into the  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET. This feed is then redirected out to a Modero panel  
through the front Audio/Video CAT5 port.  
• ETHERNET:  
RJ-45 connector routes data to the G4 touch panel through the front Ethernet  
port. These connections use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable to provide  
communication between the target touch panel, breakout box, and NetLinx  
Master.  
• PWR  
2-pin mini-Phoenix connector that connects to a PSN power supply. This port  
can be used to provide power to a Modero panel by sending it through the  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET (rear power connector through to the front power  
connector).  
Wiring the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET for Unbalanced Audio  
Most domestic audio equipment has unbalanced audio inputs and outputs. This means that the  
audio output (left, right, or mono) appears on a single wire, and is referenced to "0 V" or "Ground".  
Typical connectors used are RCA "phono" connectors, DIN plugs/sockets, and 0.25" (6.3mm) or  
3.5mm jack plugs/sockets.  
Unbalanced audio is adequate for most domestic environments and for line-level signals in a typical  
broadcast studio. Problems may occur if the signals are carried over long distances, especially if the  
source and destination have separate main supplies. Use the following wiring drawing (FIG. 8) to  
configure an unbalanced audio connection.  
GND  
Unbalanced IN  
(Jumper IN- to GND)  
Left Channel  
IN-  
IN+  
GND  
Unbalanced IN  
(Jumper IN- to GND)  
Right Channel  
Microphone  
IN-  
IN+  
AUDIO IN  
MIC OUT  
GND  
Unbalanced OUT  
OUT-  
OUT+  
FIG. 8 Wiring the rear AUDIO IN and MIC OUT for use with Unbalanced Audio  
When using unbalanced audio for the AUDIO IN connector (FIG. 8), the "-" and the "GND"  
terminals should be connected together and then connected to the GND of the unbalance audio  
signal. When connecting to an unbalanced audio input from the MIC OUT connector (FIG. 8), wire  
the "+" terminal to the signal input, and the "GND" terminal to the signal ground.  
10  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Wiring the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET for Balanced Audio  
Professional audio equipment will often use balanced audio inputs and outputs, usually on 3-pin  
"XLR" connectors. A balanced audio signal consists of a pair of wires carrying the audio signal in  
anti-phase with each other (if one wire carries a positive voltage, the other carries an equal and  
opposite negative voltage).  
The advantage of balanced audio over unbalanced audio is its ability to reject external interference  
added as the signal is carried over the wire. The receiving equipment takes the voltage difference  
between the two wires as the input signal. Interference will usually get added to both wires equally,  
and so gets cancelled by the receiving equipment.  
The 3 wires used in a typical XLR lead are often referred to as Ground, Live (Hot) and Return  
(Cold). "Live" and "Return" carry the "in-phase" and "out-of-phase" versions of the audio  
respectively. The pins of the XLR plug/socket are as follows:  
• X = Ground  
• L = Live (Hot)  
• R = Return (Cold)  
When connecting the MIC OUT connector to a balanced audio input (FIG. 9), use all three audio  
terminals (+, -, and GND), then connect the "+" terminal to the "live" signal, the "-" terminal to the  
"return" signal, and the "GND" terminal to the ground signal.  
Ground signal  
GND  
Return signal  
Balanced OUT  
OUT-  
Line signal  
OUT+  
FIG. 9 Wiring the rear MIC OUT connector for use with Balanced Audio  
Modero Table Top Cable (CA2250-50)  
The CV7 Table Top Touch Panel comes with a standard 10' (3.048 m) Modero cable (CA2250-50)  
that supports Ethernet, Audio/Video, and Power connections. The cable comes terminated with two  
RJ45 connectors (Ethernet and Audio/Video) and a single 2-pin mini-Phoenix connector for power.  
FIG. 10 10 Foot Modero Table Top Cable  
11  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Product Specifications  
Modero Table Top Cable Specifications  
Dimensions (HWD):  
• Length: 10 feet (3.048 m)  
Connectors:  
• Ethernet RJ-45 connector (White) routes Ethernet signals between the touch  
panel and the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box.  
• Audio/Video RJ-45 connector (Black) routes differential audio/video signals  
between the touch panel and the box.  
• 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix power connector to route power from the external  
breakout box to the target panel.  
Included Accessories:  
• Modero Table Top Cable (CA2250-50)  
Wiring information for the Modero Table Top cable  
If your installation requires custom cable configurations, you can purchase bulk (non-terminated)  
cable from Liberty Wire and Cable under the nomenclature "AMX Table Top Cable - Modero"  
(phone#: (800) 530 8998 or +1-719-388-7518).  
When building a custom Table Top cable, please refer to the table below to calculate the maximum  
length of the cable for your particular installation/setup.  
Maximum Table Top Cable Lengths for Modero Panels  
Panel Sizes:  
Setup I: Using a panel without a battery base*:  
Maximum cable length 150’ (45.72 m) 150’ (45.72 m) 49’ (14.94 m) 39’ (11.89 m) 10’ (3.05 m)  
Setup II: Using a panel with a battery base*:  
7" Panel  
10" Panel  
12" Panel  
15" Panel  
17" Panel  
Maximum cable length  
56’ (17.07 m) 56’ (17.07 m) 25’ (7.62 m)  
15’ (4.57 m)  
10’ (3.05 m)  
* The total Modero cable run from the 13.5 V power source (PSN4.4).  
* The total Modero cable run from the 13.5 V power source (PSN6.5).  
FIG. 11 shows the top and cross-section views of the Table Top cable.  
6 inches  
3 inches  
Red  
3
2
3
2
1
1
Red  
To Touch Panel  
To Breakout Box  
Connector  
Connector  
1
2
- used for Audio/Video (Black)  
- used for Ethernet (White)  
Connector  
3
- used for Power  
FIG. 11 Modero Table Top cable (top and cross-section views)  
12  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
The following table provides the wiring information (color coding) for each of the three available  
cable connectors on each side of the Modero Table Top Cable.  
Modero Table Top Cable Wiring Table  
Wire  
Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
White/Orange White/Orange  
Orange/White Orange/White  
Red  
Black  
White/Green  
Blue/White  
White/Green  
Blue/White  
-
-
-
-
-
-
White/Blue  
White/Blue  
Green/White  
White/Brown  
Brown/White  
Green/White  
White/Brown  
Brown/White  
The following figures provide a cross-section view (FIG. 12) and a description (FIG. 13) of the  
Modero Table Top Cable:  
Element #1  
Connector #1 & 2  
Binder  
Element #2  
Connector #3  
Jacket  
FIG. 12 Table Top Cable - cross-section view  
DESCRIPTION:  
9/PAIRS COMPOSITE CABLE CONSISTING OF: ELEMENT #1:  
TWO 4/PAIR 24 AWG STRANDED TINNED COPPER,  
POLYETHYLENE INSULATION, ELEMENT #2: 1/PAIR 18 AWG  
STRANDED TNNED COPPER, PVC INSULATION AND FOIL  
SHIELDED OVERALL PAPER BINDER AND FLEX-PVC JACKET.  
ELEMENT #1:  
2 X 4/PAIRS:  
24 AWG STRANDED COPPER  
CONDUCTOR: 24 AWG 7/32 TINNED COPPER; OD .024" NOMINAL  
INSULATION: .0075" WALL POLYETHYLENE; OD .039" NOMINAL  
COLOR CODE: P1: WHITE/BLUE, BLUE  
P2: WHITE/ORANGE, ORANGE  
P3: WHITE/GREEN, GREEN  
P4: WHITE/BROWN, BROWN  
PAIR:  
2 CONDUCTORS TWINNED LEFT HAND LAY  
(TWISTED AT VARIED LAYS TO MINIMIZE CROSS TALK)  
4/P CABLED LEFT HAND LAY (BLUE BINDER, ORANGE BINDER)  
PAPER TAPE  
CABLE:  
BINDER:  
ELEMENT #2:  
1 PAIR: 18 AWG SHIELDED  
CONDUCTOR: 18 AWG 16/30 TINNED COPPER; OD .046" NOMINAL  
INSULATION: .010" WALL PVC; OD .066" NOMINAL  
COLOR CODE: BLACK, RED  
DRAIN WIRE:  
SHIELD:  
#22 7/30 TINNED COPPER  
ALUM/POLYESTER TAPE (FOIL SIDE IN)  
FINAL ASSEMBLY: TWO ELEMENT #1 & ELEMENT #2 CABLED ON COMMON  
AXIS TO MINIMIZE DIAMETER  
BINDER:  
JACKET:  
COLOR:  
CLOTH TAPE 25% OVERLAP  
.045" WALL FLEXIBLE PVC,  
BLACK MATT  
DIAMETER:  
MARKING:  
.375 INCHES NOMINAL  
NONE  
FIG. 13 Table Top Cable - Specification Elements  
13  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Each bundle of 4 twisted pairs includes a colored tape indicator for identification.  
NXA-WC80211B/CF 802.11b Wireless Card (FG2255-03)  
CV7 touch panels can connect to a wireless network using an optional internal AMX 802.11b  
compatible Wi-Fi Wireless Interface Card shown in FIG. 14.  
FIG. 14 NXA-WC80211B/CF Wireless Interface Card (WIC)  
This unit is certified and available for use in the United States (FCC), Canada (IC),  
Europe (CE) and Japan (TELEC).  
The NXA-WC80211B/CF Wireless Interface Card works with compatible 802.11b Wireless  
Access Points such as the NXA-WAP200G. Please follow your particular Wireless Access Point’s  
instruction manual for the correct procedures to setup either a secured or unsecured connection.  
Specifications for NXA-WC80211B/CF  
Dimensions (HWD):  
Weight:  
• 2.07" x 1.68" x 0.21" (52.56 mm x 42.80 mm x 5.57 mm)  
• 0.88 oz (25g)  
Description:  
• 2.4 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) 802.11b 11M wireless  
PC card with detachable Antenna.  
Features:  
• Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) 64-bit and 128-bit data encryption  
• Diversity Antenna Connectors automatically select the best available signal  
• Supports infrastructure (communications to wired networks via Access  
Points), and roaming (standard IEEE 802.11b compliant)  
Power Consumption:  
• TX power consumption: < 265 mA  
• RX power consumption: < 165 mA  
• Sleep Mode: 2 mA - 15 mA  
• 5 / 3.3 V  
Operating Voltage:  
RF Output Power:  
• 15 dBm +/- 1 dBm  
• Channels 1 - 11 (North America)  
• 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 11Mbps, Auto Rate  
• IEEE 802.11b  
Radio Data Rate:  
Network Standard:  
Interoperability:  
Number of Channels:  
Security:  
• Interoperable with Wi-Fi (WECA) certified products  
• 14  
• WEP 64,128 bit, WPA/TKIP  
• Compact Flash Type I  
Host Interface:  
14  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Specifications for NXA-WC80211B/CF  
Modulation:  
• DSSS, DBSK, DQSK, CCK  
LED Indicators:  
Antenna:  
• Power / Link activity  
• 2, Ceramic (Diversity Supported)  
Receive Sensitivity:  
• @PER < 8%  
11 Mbps: -83 dBm (max)  
5.5 Mbps: -86 dBm (max)  
2 Mbps: -89 dBm (max)  
1 Mbps: -92 dBm (max)  
Operating Channels:  
Wireless Restrictions:  
• 11 Channels (USA, Canada)  
• 13 Channels (Europe)  
• 14 Channels (Japan)  
• 4 Channels (France)  
• In R&TTE countries, such as France, the 802.11g frequency band is  
restricted to 2454 - 2483.5 MHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) and a max power output  
of 100 mW EIRP outdoor.  
Operating Environment:  
Certifications:  
Temperature: 0°C ~ 70°C (non-operating) and -15 ~ 80°C (storage)  
• Humidity (non-condensing): 5% ~ 95% RH  
• FCC (United States)  
• IC (Canada)  
• CE (Europe)  
• TELEC (Japan)  
It is recommended that any upgrade of internal equipment be done simultaneously in  
order to reduce the risk of damage to internal components.  
Installation of the Wireless Card (Table Top Panel)  
These procedures involve removing the outer housing, installing the wireless card, and then  
securely replacing the outer housing back onto the NXT panel.  
The CV7 panels do not come factory installed with the NXA-WC802.11B/CF wireless  
interface card. This card must be ordered separately from AMX.  
Step 1: Removing the NXT Outer Housing  
1. Carefully detach all connectors from the rear of the touch panel.  
Do not use Ethernet cables containing mounting boots. These boots could make  
removal of the Ethernet connectors (from the panel) difficult and cumbersome.  
2. Gently place the touch panel LCD facedown onto a soft cloth to expose the under-side of the  
base (FIG. 15) and prevent scratching of the LCD. Tilt the base forward so that both the bottom  
surface and Housing Screws are easily accessible.  
3. While holding the outer housing and base plate at an angle (to prevent it from sliding), use a  
grounded Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the four Housing Screws.  
15  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Unscrew these four Housing Screws  
to remove the Circuit Board Cover  
Base  
Hinge Brackets (2)  
Touch Panel  
DO NOT REMOVE these screws  
They secure the plastic base front cover.  
FIG. 15 Location of the attachment screws underneath an NXT-CV7 panel base  
Note the location of the four plastic adhesive "feet". Once the outer housing is  
placed back onto the panel, these "feet" must be placed back onto their  
original locations so they can fit into their provided openings on the Battery  
Base.  
4. Rotate the panel back over (while gripping the entire unit and outer housing) and rest the base  
back onto a flat surface.  
5. Gently push the LCD panel backwards to expose the Tilt Bracket/speaker assembly.  
Tilt Bracket/speaker assembly  
Tilt Bracket Screws (2)  
These two screws must  
Outer Housing  
first be removed before  
being able to remove  
the outer housing.  
Base  
Hinge Brackets (2)  
FIG. 16 Location of the Tilt Bracket screws  
6. Locate the two screw holes at either sides of the front speaker grill and use a grounded  
Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the two Tilt Bracket Screws (FIG. 16). This procedure  
loosens the rear Tilt Bracket cover plate (with the AMX logo and Hinge brackets) and provides  
greater flexibility for the removal of the outer housing. Without this step, the Hinge brackets  
(FIG. 16) present an obstacle to the removal of the outer housing and restrict access to the  
circuit board.  
7. Tilt the LCD panel back up to gain better access to the Tilt Bracket cover plate.  
16  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
8. In a single motion, carefully pull both the Tilt Bracket cover plate and outer housing up and  
then out (away from the LCD panel) to expose the internal circuit board (FIG. 17).  
Outer Housing  
Tilt Bracket cover plate  
(must be removed first)  
Outer housing  
installation holes  
(located on front panel)  
Base  
FIG. 17 Removal of the outer housing and wireless card location  
Step 2: Upgrading internal components (Compact Flash and Wireless cards)  
1. Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object.  
2. Locate the 64 MB Compact Flash and Wireless Interface cards on the main board (FIG. 18).  
Tilt Bracket  
Front of panel  
Compact Flash Card  
(Slot 1)  
Wireless Interface Card  
(Slot 2)  
Card Removal Grooves  
Card removal grooves  
FIG. 18 Location and orientation of the card slots (both CV7 panels)  
3. Insert a grounded flathead screwdriver into one of the card removal grooves (located on either  
side of the card), and gently pry the card up and off the connector pins. Repeat this process on  
the opposite card removal groove. This alternating action causes the card to "wiggle" away  
from the on-board connector pins.  
4. Slip your finger into the opening between the connector pins and the card, and push the card  
out to remove it.  
5. Remove the upgrade card from it’s anti-static bag.  
17  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
6. Insert the upgrade card into the connector opening with the arrow facing towards the pins, then  
push it in firmly until the contact pins are completely inside the flash card and securely  
attached to the connector.  
Card removal  
grooves  
On-board connector with contact pins  
Insert with arrow  
facing towards the pins  
Connector opening  
FIG. 19 Removing/installing a compact flash card  
7. Repeat steps 3-6 for installation of the (optional) NXA-WC80211B/CF 802.11b wireless  
interface card into the remaining open card slot.  
Any new internal card upgrade is detected by the panel only after power is cycled.  
Step 3: Closing and Securing the NXT Enclosure  
1. In a single motion, gently slide the rear Tilt Bracket cover plate back over the tilt mechanism  
(located below the LCD) and (while angling the housing downwards) slide the outer housing  
below the Tilt Bracket and towards the LCD (at a downward angle).  
2. Locate the two screw holes at either sides of the front speaker grill.  
3. Use a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver to both insert and secure the two Tilt Bracket Screws  
(FIG. 16). This procedure resecures the rear Tilt Bracket cover plate (with the AMX logo and  
Hinge brackets).  
4. Press the outer housing forwards until it is aligned over the outer housing installation holes.  
Once installed and secured, the tilt bracket prevents any further movement (FIG. 17).  
5. Gently press down on the housing (toward the base) until it is securely positioned over the  
circuit board and base.  
6. While holding the circuit board cover in place, turn the panel back over until the LCD lies  
facedown on a soft cloth and the under-side of the base is exposed.  
7. Insert and secure the four Housing Screws (using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver) in  
their respective locations, as shown in FIG. 15 on page 16.  
8. Replace any adhesive plastic "feet" that might have been removed during the removal process  
of the outer housing. These "feet" must be placed back onto their original locations so they can  
fit into their provided openings on the Battery Base.  
18  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
9. Grasp both the LCD and housing and then rotate the entire unit back onto a flat surface.  
10. Insert all connectors and apply power.  
Installation of the Wireless Card (WallMount Panel)  
These procedures involve removing the outer housing, installing the wireless card, and then  
securely replacing the outer housing back onto the NXD panel.  
The CV7 panels do not come factory installed with the NXA-WC802.11B/CF wireless  
interface card. This card must be ordered separately from AMX.  
Step 1: Removing the existing NXD Outer Housing  
1. Detach all connectors from the side of the touch panel.  
2. Remove the faceplate from the CV7.  
3. Place the LCD facedown on a soft cloth to expose the under-side of the unit (FIG. 20) and  
prevent scratching of the LCD.  
Two (2) connector  
overlay release latches  
Unscrew these  
four pan-head  
housing screws  
to remove the  
back box  
(2 per side)  
FIG. 20 Location of the attachment screws and connector overlay release latches on an NXD back box  
4. Firmly press down on both connector overlay release latches (located in front of the  
connectors). Pressing down releases the connector overlay from atop the connectors.  
The overlay connector must first be released before the rear back box can be  
removed from the NXD-CV7 panel.  
5. Gently slide the connector overlay away from the back box housing.  
6. Unscrew the outer housing (back box) by using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver to  
remove the two sets of pan-head Housing Screws, located on other side of the connector  
overlay (FIG. 20).  
19  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Caution: Speaker wires come  
connected to this side of the main  
board. Use caution when removing  
the back box.  
Connector Overlay must first be  
removed from the side of the NXD  
Compact Card  
Slot #1 located  
on the bottom slot  
FIG. 21 Removing the rear back box from the main unit  
The internal circuit board comes pre-wired to internal speakers located on the  
internal side of the back box. If the back box is removed incorrectly, these speaker  
wires can become disconnected and damaged.  
7. Carefully lift-off the back box housing and angle it over to the side of the unit where the wires  
are connected to the circuit board.  
8. Gently lay the back box to one side of the unit. This exposes the internal circuit board  
(FIG. 21). Take care not to place undue strain on the speaker cables.  
Step 2: Installing the Upgrade Components (NXD)  
1. Complete the procedures outline within the Step 2: Upgrading internal components (Compact  
Flash and Wireless cards) section on page 17 and then continue with the following Step 3.  
Step 3: Replacing and Securing the NXD Enclosure  
1. Gently place the outer housing back onto the panel and align the four pan-head Housing  
Screws holes along the edges of the outer housing.  
2. Insert and secure the four pan-head Housing Screws back into their pre-drilled holes by using a  
grounded Phillips-head screwdriver.  
3. Slip the connector overlay back into the connector opening by inserting the top of the overlay  
into the connector opening in an upwards direction.  
4. Align the connectors to their respective locations and secure the overlay by pushing it towards  
the connectors until the overlay securely snaps back into the overlay release latches.  
5. Re-install the faceplate onto the panel. Refer to the Installing the Button Trim Ring section on  
page 31 for more detailed faceplate installation information.  
20  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
NXA-CFSP Compact Flash (2116-3x)  
Every CV7 Modero panel is shipped with a 64 MB Compact Flash card (NXA-CFSP).  
If possible, upgrade the panel’s internal components (Compact Flash or wireless  
interface cards) prior to installing or using the panel.  
The NXA-CFSP Compact Flash card is factory programmed with specific panel firmware and can  
be upgraded to several sizes, up to 1GB:  
Optional Compact Flash Upgrades  
• NXA-CFSP128M - 128 MB Compact Flash card (FG2116-36)  
• NXA-CFSP256M - 256 MB Compact Flash card (FG2116-37)  
• NXA-CFSP512M - 512 MB Compact Flash card (FG2116-38)  
• NXA-CFSP1G - 1 GB Compact Flash card  
(FG2116-39)  
Installation Procedures for the Compact Flash Card (Table Top Panel)  
Refer to the procedures outlined within the Installation of the Wireless Card (Table Top  
Installation Procedures for the Compact Flash Card (WallMount Panel)  
Refer to the procedures outlined within the Installation of the Wireless Card (WallMount  
NXT-BP Power Pack (FG2255-10)  
The NXT-BP Power Pack (FIG. 22) is a rechargeable Lithium-Ion "smart" battery used to provide  
power to the NXT Modero panel through the NXA-BASE/1 Battery Base. This battery incorporates  
an on-board battery life indicator. The NXT-BP battery can be charged through either the base  
(when connected to the CV7 panel) or through an optional NXT-CHG Modero Power Station.  
Although this product is included within the NXA-BASE/1 Kit (Fg2255-05K), extra NXT-BP  
Power Packs (FG2255-10) can be purchased separately as an optional accessory.  
FIG. 22 NXT-BP Power Pack  
21  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
           
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Specifications for the NXT-BP  
Dimensions (HWD):  
Power (Voltage):  
Weight:  
• 0.69" x 3.50" x 5.81" (1.75 cm x 8.89 cm x 14.76 cm)  
• 11.1 Volts (nominal)  
• Single NXT-BP Power Pack: 1.0 lbs (0.45 kg)  
• Battery Usage: 4 to 8 hours (time is usage dependant)  
• Charge Capacity: 6000mAh  
Features:  
Operating / Storage  
Environment:  
• Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)  
• Operating Humidity: 20% - 85% RH  
• Storage/Discharge Temperature: -20° C (-4° F) to 60° C (140° F)  
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH  
NXA-BASE/1 Battery Base Kit (FG2255-05K)  
The NXA-BASE/1 Kit contains a single NXT-BP battery and one battery base. The NXA-BASE/1  
(FIG. 23) is a Modero accessory that allows an NXT-CV7 touch panel to function off the charge  
from a single internally connected NXT-BP battery. The base provides both power and battery  
information to the panel via the panel interface connector. The NXT-BP battery can be charged  
through either the base (only when connected to the NXT-CV7 touch panel) or through an optional  
NXT-CHG Modero Power Station Kit (FG2255-50K). When used with the optional battery base,  
the CV7 panels will charge the battery during full operation.  
Panel Interface  
connector  
NXT-BP  
Modero Power Pack  
NXA-BASE/1  
Battery Base  
FIG. 23 NXA-BASE/1 Kit (consists of one BASE/1 and a single NXT-BP)  
Specifications for the NXA-BASE/1  
Dimensions (HWD):  
Power Requirements:  
Weight:  
• 0.93" x 5.96" x 6.89" (2.36 cm x 15.14 cm x 17.51 cm)  
• 1.4 A @ 12 VDC (max power draw while charging a single battery)  
• Base unit: 0.75 lbs (0.34 kg)  
• Base and 1 battery: 1.75 lbs (0.79 kg)  
Features:  
• Charge time for single depleted battery: ~ 5 - 8 hours  
• Must be connected to a Modero unit utilizing a PSN4.4 power supply  
• Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)  
• Operating Humidity: 20% - 85% RH  
Operating / Storage  
Environment:  
• Storage Temperature: -20° C (-4° F) to 60° C (140° F)  
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH  
Included Accessories:  
Optional Accessories:  
• NXA-BASE/1 (FG2250-05k): 1 battery base and 1 NXT-BP battery  
• NXT-CHG Kit (FG2250-50K):  
1 charger and 2 NXT-BP batteries  
• NXT-BP battery pack (FG2255-10) (additional)  
22  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Before beginning the installation of the battery base to the Modero panel, verify the  
Modero panel has the latest firmware. Only the latest build incorporates the  
necessary updates for using the Modero with the NXA-BASE/1. From the Battery  
Base page, verify that the battery base is loaded with the latest NXA-BASE/1  
firmware (v2.xx or higher).  
Checking the NXT-BP charge  
1. Press the Battery Life Indicator button (FIG. 24) once to illuminate the Battery Life LEDs and  
display the percent charge remaining on the battery (this indication lasts a few seconds).  
Battery Life (Charge) Display  
Battery Life Indicator button  
FIG. 24 NXT-BP Battery Pack (showing the battery life indicator and button)  
2. Charge the NXT-BP battery by either inserting it into the battery base or from within the  
optional NXT-CHG charger (which can sequentially charge up to two batteries).  
It is recommended to fully charge this battery before using it to power an NXT-CV7  
panel. If the 25% LED indicator is blinking, recharge your battery immediately.  
This blinking indicates there is less than 5% of a charge remaining on the battery.  
Installing an NXT-BP into the NXA-BASE/1  
The base does not directly connect to a power supply. Instead, it receives the power necessary to  
charge the battery from the Modero panel (through the Panel Interface connector).  
1. Install the NXT-BP battery into the base’s battery compartment with the label-side facing up.  
2. Align the battery connector with its corresponding battery connector port (located in the  
battery compartment shown in FIG. 25).  
NXT-BP Battery  
Battery  
Connector  
Battery  
Connector  
Port  
FRONT  
FIG. 25 Battery installation  
23  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
       
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
3. Carefully insert the NXT-BP into the base until the battery securely fits onto the Battery  
Connector Port.  
Installing the NXA-BASE/1 below an NXT-CV7 Panel  
1. Power Off the panel before attempting to attach the NXA-BASE/1.  
2. Place the battery base (with battery) onto a flat/level surface.  
3. Turn the battery locking slider (FIG. 26) to one side until the locking mechanism is horizontal  
to the base (going left to right) and the rear battery latch is pointing directly outward (away  
from the LCD).  
Alignment  
pegs (2)  
Battery  
locking  
Back  
Panel Interface  
mechanism  
connector (male)  
Battery  
locking slider  
(Battery not shown  
for illustration purposes)  
Front  
Insert holes for  
NXT-CV7 feet  
Securing  
pegs (2)  
FIG. 26 NXA-BASE/1 showing Panel Interface and connector locations  
4. Carefully angle the NXT-CV7 panel over the front alignment pegs (FIG. 27). The pegs assist in  
both aligning and securing the panel to the base (the locking mechanism secures the base to  
panel when done).  
Battery  
locking  
mechanism  
(with locking  
slider)  
Alignment  
pegs  
FIG. 27 NXA-BASE/1 shown aligning with NXT-CV7 panel  
5. Insert the alignment pegs into their corresponding holes below the front of the panel.  
6. Verify the alignment of the Panel Interface connectors between the panel (female connector)  
and base (male connector) (FIG. 27).  
24  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
       
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
7. Align the rear pegs and gently push the rear of the panel downwards until it is mounted atop  
the battery base.  
The battery base CANNOT be hot-swapped. An NXT can not be receiving power  
(through a connected power supply) and then be connected to a battery base. Always  
POWER OFF the panel before installing the NXA-BASE/1.  
8. Slide the rear battery locking slider in the opposite direction. This turns the latching  
mechanism and secures the panel to the base.  
9. Upon successful connection, the AMX logo appears on the panel to indicate that the panel is  
properly connected and receiving power.  
Charging the NXT-BP using the NXA-BASE/1  
1. Insert the single battery into the battery compartment shown in FIG. 26 on page 24.  
2. Follow the procedures from the previous sub-section to attach the NXT-CV7 to the  
NXA-BASE/1.  
3. Insert a 2-pin connector from a power supply to the rear PWR connector on the NXT-CV7  
Modero panel. Refer to the Battery Base Page section on page 95 to view the charging progress  
of the connected NXT-BP.  
NXT-CHG Battery Charger Kit (FG2255-50K)  
The NXT-CHG Kit includes one charger and two NXT-BP batteries. The optional NXT-CHG  
Modero Power Station (FIG. 28) is a two-slot, stand-alone battery charger that can be used to  
recharge up to two NXT-BP batteries. The batteries are charged in the order they are inserted into  
the charger. The NXT-CHG Slot 1 has the feature of being able to completely discharge and  
recharge (recalibrate) a battery.  
Battery Life indicator  
NXT-BP Modero Power Pack (battery)  
NXT-CHG Modero Power Station (charger)  
FIG. 28 NXT-CHG Kit (consists of one NXT-CHG charger and two NXT-BP batteries)  
25  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
       
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
Specifications for NXT-BP and NXT-CHG  
Dimensions (HWD):  
Power Requirements:  
• 1.13" x 8.63" x 11.81" (2.86 cm x 21.91 cm x 30.00 cm)  
• NXT-BP Battery Voltage - 11.1 Volts  
• NXT-CHG: 90 - 264 VAC, 47-63 Hz, Single Phase  
(using the included 24 VDC power supply)  
Weight:  
• 0.57 lbs (0.26 kg)  
Features:  
• Charge time for two depleted batteries: ~ 5 hours  
• Charge Rate: 2.5 A @ 12 VDC  
• 2-Bays: Sequential charging  
• LED: One LED indicator in front of each bay which conveys the status of that  
bay. Refer to the Reading the NXT-CHG LED Indicator section for more  
information.  
• Recalibration pushbutton (located between the bays): Initiates recalibration  
sequence in the left bay only.  
• Recalibration Time: less than 9 hours  
Optional Accessories:  
• NXT-CHG Kit (FG2250-50K):  
- 1 charger and 2 NXT-BP batteries  
• NXT-BP battery pack (FG2255-10) (additional)  
Powering the NXT-CHG  
Recalibration improves the reporting accuracy of the battery charge back to the  
Modero panel.  
The NXT-CHG Smart Battery Charger uses an included power supply to charge inserted batteries.  
1. Connect the rear of the NXT-CHG to the power adapter.  
2. Connect the power adapter to the provided power cord (with plug).  
3. Provide power to the unit by connecting the power cord (with plug) into a power outlet that  
meets the requirements outlined in the Specifications section for the NXT-CHG.  
Reading the NXT-CHG LED Indicator  
FIG. 29 shows the components on the NXT-CHG Smart Battery Charger.  
Slot 1  
(recalibration)  
Slot 2  
Slot 1  
LED  
Slot 2  
LED  
Recalibrate  
Pushbutton  
FIG. 29 Component locations on the NXT-CHG  
26  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
There is one LED indicator on the front of each battery slot that indicates the status of that slot. The  
blink patterns for these LEDs are described in the following table:  
Off:  
Green Flashing: Fast charging.  
Green Solid: Fully charged.  
Yellow Flashing: Recalibration in process.  
No battery detected.  
Yellow/Green:  
Yellow Solid:  
Red Flash:  
Recalibration complete.  
Standby (waiting for other battery to charge).  
Error (problem with either the battery connection to the internal slot, or with  
the battery itself).  
Charging the NXT-BP batteries using the NXT-CHG  
1. Review the Checking the NXT-BP charge section on page 23 to confirm the percentage of  
charge remaining on the batteries.  
2. Provide power to the charger (as outlined in the Powering the NXT-CHG section on page 26).  
3. Align the battery connector with the corresponding charge slot.  
4. Firmly insert the battery into the desired slot until the battery is both securely located within  
the slot and there is activity from the corresponding Slot LED. Refer to the Reading the NXT-  
CHG LED Indicator section on page 26 section for LED information.  
Recalibrating the batteries  
The recalibration process increases the accuracy of the battery charge level. Recalibration of the  
batteries is only done upon a user request from the Modero on-screen Battery Base page.  
Recalibration can only be done within Slot 1 on the NXT-CHG.  
1. Place the selected battery securely into Slot 1 (left slot) until there is activity on the  
Slot 1 LED.  
2. Push the Recalibration pushbutton (located between the two slots) to initiate recalibration in  
the left bay only.  
27  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
CV7 Touch Panel Accessories  
28  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Installation  
Installation  
NXT panels are mounted onto flat (horizontal) surfaces in either a stand-alone or combo (NXT atop  
an NXA-BASE/1 battery base) configuration. NXD panels are installed into either a pre-wall  
surface (using a CB-TP7 conduit/wallbox) or a solid surface (using either solid surface or drywall  
screws).  
It is recommended that if you are planning on upgrading your panel components  
(flash and wireless), you do so before beginning any panel installations.  
Unpacking the Panel  
1. Inspect and confirm the contents of the shipment box to verify you have all specified parts.  
information about included and optional accessories.  
2. Carefully remove the panel from the shipping box.  
3. Carefully peel the protective plastic cover from the LCD.  
If the protective plastic LCD cover is not removed, the panel may not respond  
properly to touch points on the LCD or allow proper screen calibration.  
Installing the Internal Components  
Installation of the internal components such as the upgraded Compact Flash and the  
NXA-WC80211B/CF Wireless card are described in detail within the following sections:  
Installing the No-Button Trim Ring  
The NXD-CV7 panel is shipped from AMX with the default Button Trim Ring already installed.  
The unit is also shipped with an separate Trim Ring containing no button openings (a No-Button  
Trim Ring) that allows you, if desired, to change the default configuration of the NXD panel  
Faceplate to that with no-button openings. In order to install this included No-Button Trim Ring,  
you must first remove the factory-installed default Button Trim Ring, the six small buttons, and  
associated two clear light pipes.  
1. The outer Button Trim Ring is secured to the Faceplate with plastic latches. To remove the  
Faceplate, simply pull it away from the panel by gently tugging it outwards until the entire  
Faceplate comes away from the panel.  
2. Turn the Faceplate over to expose the inside surface and view the Trim Ring latches (FIG. 30).  
3. In a single motion, press down and then outwards on the three Trim Ring latches located along  
the top of the internal surface of the Faceplate to begin removing the Button Trim Ring.  
29  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
       
Installation  
Removing the Internal Faceplate from the panel exposes the pushbuttons and light pipes along  
the inside of the Internal Faceplate.  
4. Gently tug along the edges of the Button Trim Ring and work your way around the edges to  
remove it from the Faceplate (FIG. 30).  
CV7 Panel/enclosure  
Button latch  
Trim  
Ring  
Latches  
Light Pipe latch  
(black)  
Button and Light Pipe removal  
(showing the internal surface of Faceplate)  
Default Button Trim Ring  
(with button openings)  
Faceplate  
(outside surface shown)  
FIG. 30 Removing the default Button Trim Ring  
5. From along the internal surface of the Faceplate, remove the six buttons by gently bending  
each Button latch up and pulling the button outwards.  
6. Remove the pair of clear light pipe strips by bending the two black light pipe latches inwards  
and pulling out the strip.  
7. Grasp the No-Button Trim Ring on both sides and fit it into the groove along the outside  
surface of the Faceplate (made available by the removal of the previous Trim Ring).  
8. Gently insert the Trim Ring latches into their corresponding openings on the outer surface of  
9. Firmly press down around the No-Button Trim Ring until all of the latches are securely  
inserted into their openings on the Faceplate, and the No-Button Trim Ring is securely  
fastened. Verify the No-Button Trim Ring is firmly inserted onto the Faceplate and that there  
are no gaps between this Trim Ring and the outer surface of the Faceplate.  
10. Place the Faceplate back onto the main NXD-CV7 unit. Make sure to align the Microphone,  
Light, and PIR Motion sensor locations on the main unit to their respective openings on the  
Faceplate assembly.  
30  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Installation  
No-Button Trim Ring  
Hollow button openings  
Faceplate (outer surface shown)  
FIG. 31 Inserting the No-Button Trim Ring  
Installing the Button Trim Ring  
The outer No-Button Trim Ring is secured to the Faceplate with plastic latches. In order to  
re-install the Button Trim Ring back onto an NXD panel which has had the default Button Trim  
Ring features removed; you must first remove the No-Button Trim Ring:  
1. To remove the Faceplate, simply pull it away from the panel by gently tugging it outwards until  
the entire Faceplate comes away from the panel.  
2. Turn the Faceplate over to expose the inside surface and view the Trim Ring latches.  
3. In a single motion, press down and then outwards on the three Trim Ring latches located along  
the top of the internal surface of the Faceplate to begin removing the Trim Ring. Removing the  
Internal Faceplate from the panel exposes the pushbuttons openings left from an earlier  
removal of the pushbuttons and LEDs.  
4. Gently tug along the edges of the No-Button Trim Ring and work your way around the edges  
to remove it from the Faceplate (FIG. 32).  
5. From along the internal surface of the Faceplate, install the six buttons by firmly inserting them  
into the button openings until the Button latch secures the button in place (FIG. 32).  
6. Install the pair of clear light pipe strips by pushing light pipes over the two black light pipe  
latches.  
7. Grasp the Button Trim Ring on both sides and fit it into the groove along the outside surface of  
the Faceplate (made available by the removal of the previous Trim Ring).  
31  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Installation  
CV7 Panel/enclosure  
Button latch  
Trim  
Ring  
Latches  
Light Pipe latch  
(black)  
Button and Light Pipe removal  
(showing the internal surface of Faceplate)  
No-Button Trim Ring  
Faceplate  
(outside surface shown)  
FIG. 32 Removing the No-Button Trim Ring  
8. Gently insert the Button Trim Ring latches into their corresponding openings on the outer  
surface of the internal Faceplate (FIG. 33).  
Button Trim Ring  
Faceplate (outer surface shown)  
Button openings  
FIG. 33 Inserting the Button Trim RIng  
9. Firmly press down around the Button Trim Ring until all of the latches are securely inserted  
into their openings on the Faceplate, and the Button Trim Ring is securely fastened. Verify the  
Button Trim Ring is firmly inserted onto the Faceplate and that there are no gaps between this  
Trim Ring and the outer surface of the Faceplate.  
10. Place the Faceplate back onto the main NXD-CV7 unit. Make sure to align the Microphone,  
Light, and PIR Motion sensor locations on the main unit to their respective openings on the  
Faceplate assembly.  
32  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Installation  
Pre-Wall Installation of the Conduit Box  
Wall Mount panels (NXDs) are contained within an outer housing (back box). This back box is not  
removed when installing the NXD into a Conduit Box (CB-TP7). The back box is only removed to  
gain access for the replacement of the internal components.  
INSTALLER: LEAVE A GAP BETWEEN THE STUD AND CONDUIT BOX  
MOUNTING TABS TO ACCOMMODATE THE DRYWALL or SHEETROCK.  
This gap allows the installation of the drywall or sheetrock after the CB-TP7 Conduit  
Box has been installed.  
The CB-TP7 is an optional metallic box that is secured onto a beam in a pre-wall setting (where no  
walls are present). Installation procedures and configurations can vary depending on the  
installation environment. This section describes the installation procedures for the most common  
installation scenario. The most important thing to remember when mounting this conduit box is that  
the NXD-CV7 Mounting Tabs must lie flush against the outside of the sheetrock (FIG. 34).  
Refer to SP-2258-02 for detailed installation dimensions.  
It is recommended that you cut out the surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in  
the installation drawings so that you can make any necessary cutout adjustments.  
The wiring knockouts on the left side will be used for the NXD-CV7 Wall Mount panel  
connectors, so always secure the conduit box to the stud using the Stud Mounting Holes  
on the right side of the box.  
1. Rest the right Stud Mounting tabs onto the stud (keeping the knockouts on the left). Be sure to  
leave enough of a gap between the stud and NXD Mounting tabs to accommodate the  
installation of the drywall or sheetrock after the conduit box has been mounted.  
Ultimately, the Mounting Tabs should lie flush against the outside of the sheetrock.  
2. Fasten the CB-TP7 conduit box to the stud through the holes on the right Stud Mounting tabs  
(FIG. 34), using either nails or screws.  
Stud Mounting tabs  
Stud  
Wiring  
knockouts  
NXD Mounting tabs  
(should lie flush against  
the outside of the wall)  
(must be  
located on  
left side)  
Drywall or sheetrock  
FIG. 34 CB-TP7 conduit box components  
33  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Installation  
3. Remove the wiring knockouts from the left side of the conduit box (CB-TP7)  
(FIG. 34) to accommodate the cables being threaded through to the NXD touch panel.  
Remember that when mounting this conduit box, the NXD mounting tabs must lie  
flush against the outside of the sheetrock.  
4. Thread the incoming power, RJ-45 audio/video, Ethernet, and USB wiring through the  
knockouts (use of the left wiring knockouts are recommended with this installation).  
Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re-positioning of the panel.  
5. Install the drywall/sheetrock before inserting the main NXD unit into the CB-TP7.  
Installation of an NXD Touch Panel  
The NXD-CV7 can be installed either directly into the (optional) CB-TP7 or other solid surface  
environment using the two different mounting options: drywall clips or solid surface screws. The  
following sections describe mounting the touch panel directly into a pre-wall conduit box, a solid  
surface or drywall, and optional NXA-RK7 Rack Mount Kit for installation.  
Installing the NXD panel within a Conduit Box  
The conduit box must be mounted prior to continuing this section. Refer to the procedures in the  
instructions. Verify that all necessary cables have been threaded through the knockouts on the left of  
the conduit box and the connections have been tested prior to installation of the NXD-CV7.  
1. Remove the Faceplate/bezel (A in FIG. 35) from the main NXD unit  
(B in FIG. 35) by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force.  
C - Optional CB-TP7  
conduit/wallbox  
#4-40 Mounting Screws  
(four - included)  
secure the NXD to  
the Conduit Box  
Stud  
Mounting Tab  
B - Main NXD unit consists of  
the touch panel and back box housing  
A - Faceplate/Trim Ring  
default Faceplate comes with buttons  
FIG. 35 NXD-CV7 panel installation into a CB-TP7 (pre-wall construction)  
34  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Installation  
2. Verify the incoming power, RJ-45 audio/video, Ethernet, and USB cables have been properly  
threaded through the wiring knockouts on the left of the conduit box. Leave enough slack in the  
wiring to accommodate any re-positioning of the panel.  
3. Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side  
of the (un-powered) NXD touch panel.  
Verify that the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power source before  
plugging in the 2-pin power connector.  
The USB connectors can be from either a USB extension cable, or a wireless USB RF  
transmitter.  
Don’t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel. The unit must be installed with  
the attached connectors before being inserted into the conduit box.  
4. Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and  
applying power. Verify that the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent  
repetition of the installation.  
5. Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected PSN power supply.  
6. Carefully slide the main NXD-CV7 unit (B in FIG. 35) into the conduit box, so that all  
Mounting Tab lie flush against the conduit box (C in FIG. 35).  
7. Insert and secure four #4-40 Mounting Screws (included) into their corresponding holes  
located along the sides of the NXD.  
8. Replace the Faceplate/Trim Ring (A in FIG. 35) back onto the main NXD unit  
(B in FIG. 35). Make sure to align the Microphone, Light, and PIR Motion sensor locations to  
their respective openings on the front faceplate/bezel.  
9. Reconnect the terminal RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any optional audio/video wiring to their  
respective locations (outside the conduit box) on either the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout  
Box, Ethernet port, or NetLinx Master.  
10. Reconnect the terminal power connector on the PSN and apply power.  
Installing the NXD into drywall using Expansion Clips  
Expansion clips are mounted through the three oval holes located along the rim of the NXD-CV7.  
As the screw is tightened, the clip bends toward the insertion hole and into the wall. This bending  
creates a "grip" on the wall by either pressing onto the wall or by securing the drywall between the  
housing and the drywall clip.  
The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD is that the outer frame  
(Mounting Tabs) must be installed flush against the mounting surface.  
Refer to SP-2258-01 for detailed installation dimensions (reproduced in FIG. 36).  
It is recommended that you cutout the surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in the  
installation drawings so that you can make any necessary cutout adjustments.  
35  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Installation  
1. Remove any screws or nails from the drywall before beginning.  
2. Cut out the surface for the NXD Wall Mount unit using the dimensions shown in FIG. 36. Be  
sure to cut out the three notches along the sides to accommodate the three corresponding  
drywall expansion clips (included).  
FIG. 36 NXD-CV7 Wall Mount panel dimensions using expansion clips  
3. Remove the Faceplate/bezel (A in FIG. 37) from the main NXD unit (B in FIG. 37) by  
gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force.  
4. Thread the incoming power, RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any optional audio/video wiring (from  
their terminal locations) through the surface opening. Leave enough slack in the wiring to  
accommodate any re-positioning of the panel.  
5. Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the left  
side of the (un-powered) NXD touch panel.  
Verify that the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power source before  
plugging in the 2-pin power connector.  
The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable, or a wireless USB RF  
transmitter.  
36  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Installation  
3 notches are  
required to  
accommodate the  
three expansion  
clips (included)  
Install the 3 included  
drywall clip sets  
into these locations  
Drywall Clip (3)  
Mounting Tab  
B - Main NXD unit consists of  
the touch panel and back box  
A - Faceplate  
/Trim Ring  
FIG. 37 Wall Mount panel (NXD) installation configuration for drywall surfaces  
Don’t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel. The unit must be installed with  
the attached connectors before being inserted into the drywall.  
6. Test the incoming wiring by attaching the panel connections to their terminal locations and  
applying power. Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent  
repetition of the installation.  
7. Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected PSN power supply.  
8. Install the three sets of drywall screws and expansion clips into the three oval notch locations  
along both sides of the main unit (B in FIG. 37).  
9. Carefully insert the main unit (with expansion clips) into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs on  
the NXD unit lie flush against the wall.  
The drywall clip set must be re-ordered from AMX if the drywall clip is bent  
accidentally during an installation or removed during a re-installation.  
10. Tighten all three drywall clip sets (screws and clips) until the entire Mounting Tab is securely  
fastened and flush against the wall.  
11. Place the Faceplate (A in FIG. 37) back onto the main NXD unit (B in FIG. 37). Make sure to  
align the Microphone, Light, and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on  
the front faceplate/bezel.  
37  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Installation  
12. Reconnect the terminal RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any optional audio/video wiring to their  
respective locations on either the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box, Ethernet port, or  
NetLinx Master.  
13. Reconnect the terminal power connector on the PSN and apply power to the panel.  
Installing the NXD into a Flat Surface using #4 screws  
Mounting screws (#4-40, included) are secured through two sets of circular holes located at the left  
and right sides of the NXD-CV7. The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD  
Wall Mount is that the outer frame (Mounting Tabs) must be installed flush against the mounting  
surface.  
Refer to SP-2258-01 for detailed installation dimensions (reproduced in FIG. 38).  
It is recommended that you cutout the surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in the  
installation drawings so that you can make any necessary cutout adjustments.  
1. Remove any screws or nails from the surface before beginning the cutout process.  
2. Cut out the surface for the NXD Wall Mount unit using the dimensions shown in FIG. 38.  
FIG. 38 NXD-CV7 Wall Mount panel dimensions using #4-40 mounting screws  
3. Remove the Faceplate/bezel (A in FIG. 39) from the main NXD unit (B in FIG. 39) by  
gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force.  
38  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Installation  
4. Thread the incoming power, RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any optional audio/video wiring (from  
their terminal sources) through the surface opening. Leave enough slack in the wiring to  
accommodate any re-positioning of the panel.  
5. Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the left  
side of the (un-powered) NXD touch panel.  
Verify that the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power source before  
plugging in the 2-pin power connector.  
The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable, or a wireless USB RF  
transmitter.  
Don’t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel. The unit must be installed with  
the necessary connectors before being inserted into the solid surface.  
6. Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and  
applying power. Verify that the panel is receiving power and functioning properly before  
finalizing the installation.  
Attachment is done  
along the edges  
of the cutout  
Flat installation surface  
Install the four #4-40 Mounting Screws  
(included) into these four holes  
Mounting Tab  
B - Main CV7 unit  
A - Faceplate/Trim Ring  
FIG. 39 Wall Mount panel installation configuration for flat surfaces  
7. Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the power supply.  
8. Carefully slide the main unit into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs of the CV7 unit lie flush  
against the wall.  
39  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Installation  
9. Insert and secure four #4-40 Mounting Screws (included) into their corresponding holes  
located along the sides of the NXD-CV7 (using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver) until the  
unit is secure and flush against the wall (FIG. 39).  
10. Replace the Faceplate/Trim Ring on the main unit. Make sure to align the Microphone, Light,  
and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel/faceplate.  
11. Reconnect the terminal RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any optional audio/video wiring to their  
respective locations on either the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box, Ethernet port, or  
NetLinx Master.  
12. Reconnect the terminal power connector on the PSN and apply power.  
Installing an NXD-CV7 into an (optional) Rack Mount Kit (NXA-RK7)  
The NXA-RK7 is a 19" (48.3 cm) metal rack-mount (with black matte finish) measuring 4 rack  
units high.  
1. Remove the Faceplate/Trim Ring assembly from the main CV7 unit.  
2. Thread the incoming power, RJ-45 audio/video, Ethernet, and USB wiring (from their terminal  
sources) through the surface opening, leaving enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any  
re-positioning of the panel.  
3. Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the left  
side of the (un-powered) NXD touch panel.  
Verify that the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to the a power supply  
before plugging in the 2-pin power connector.  
The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable, or a wireless USB RF  
transmitter.  
Don’t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel. The unit must be installed with  
the necessary connectors before being inserted into the equipment rack.  
4. Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and  
applying power. Verify that the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent  
repetition of the installation.  
5. Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply.  
6. Carefully insert the CV7 panel into the NXA-RK7.  
7. Secure the panel to the NXA-RK7 mount by first inserting and then tightening the four #4-40  
screws.  
8. Insert the NXA-RK7 (with connected NXD unit) into the equipment rack, making sure to align  
the screw holes along the sides on the NXA-RK7 with the holes in the equipment rack.  
9. Use a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver to secure the NXA-RK7 to the equipment rack using  
#10-32 screws (included).  
10. Replace the Faceplate/Trim Ring assembly back onto the main CV7 unit, making sure to align  
the Microphone, Light, and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the  
Faceplate/Trim Ring assembly.  
40  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Installation  
11. Reconnect the terminal RJ-45 audio/video, Ethernet, and USB wiring to their respective  
terminal locations on either the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box, Ethernet port, or  
NetLinx Master.  
12. Reconnect the terminal power connector on the PSN and apply power.  
Wiring Guidelines for the CV7 Panels  
CV7 panels require 12 VDC power from a PSN NetLinx Power Supply to operate properly. The  
panels connect to the power supply via a 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector.  
These units should only have one source of incoming power. Using more than one  
source of power to the touch panel can result in damage to the internal components  
and a possible burn out.  
Apply power to the panels only after installation is complete.  
Preparing captive wires  
You will need a wire stripper and flat-blade screwdriver to prepare and connect the captive wires.  
Never pre-tin wires for compression-type connections.  
1. Strip 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) of insulation off all wires.  
2. Insert each wire into the appropriate opening on the connector (according to the wiring  
diagrams and connector types described in this section).  
3. Tighten the screws to secure the wire in the connector. Do not tighten the screws excessively;  
doing so may strip the threads and damage the connector.  
Using the PSN NetLinx connector for power  
The PWR and GND cable from the NetLinx Power Supply (PSN4.4 or PSN6.5) must be connected  
to the corresponding location on the 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector (FIG. 40).  
PWR +  
NetLinx Power Supply  
GND -  
To the Touch Panel  
FIG. 40 NetLinx power connector wiring diagram  
1. Insert the PWR and GND wires on the terminal end of the PSN 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix  
cable. Match the wiring locations of the +/- on both the power supply and the terminal  
connector.  
2. Tighten the clamp to secure the two wires. Do not tighten the screws excessively; doing so may  
strip the threads and damage the connector.  
3. Verify the connection of the 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix to the power supply.  
41  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Installation  
Audio/Video RJ-45 Connections and Wiring  
The following table shows the signal and pinout/pairing information used on the RJ-45 Audio and  
Video connections.  
Audio/Video RJ-45 Pinout Information  
Pin  
1
Wire Color  
Orange/White  
Orange  
Function  
Right Audio In  
Right Audio In  
Video In  
Polarity  
+
-
2
3
Green/White  
Blue  
-
4
Mic Out  
-
5
White/Blue  
Green  
Mic Out  
+
+
+
-
6
Video In  
7
White/Brown  
Brown  
Left Audio In  
Left Audio In  
T I A 5 6 8 B  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(female)  
(male)  
RJ-45 connector - pin configurations  
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T RJ-45 Connections and Wiring  
FIG. 41 and the table below describe the pinouts, signals, and pairing for the Ethernet 10/100  
Base-T RJ-45 connector and cable. The Ethernet cable is connected to the rear of Table Top and  
side of the Wall Mount panels.  
A - Activity LED (yellow)  
lights when receiving or  
transmitting Ethernet  
data packets  
L - Link LED (green) lights when  
the Ethernet cables are connected  
and terminated correctly.  
A
L
ETHERNET  
10/100  
FIG. 41 Ethernet connector (showing communication and connection LEDs)  
Ethernet RJ-45 Pinouts and Signals  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
Pin  
1
Signals  
TX +  
Connections  
1 --------- 1  
2 --------- 2  
3 --------- 3  
4 --------- 4  
5 --------- 5  
6 --------- 6  
7 --------- 7  
8 --------- 8  
Pairing  
Color  
Orange-White  
Orange  
1 --------- 2  
2
TX -  
3
RX +  
3 --------- 6  
4 --------- 5  
7 --------- 8  
Green-White  
Blue  
4
no connection  
no connection  
RX -  
5
Blue-White  
Green  
6
7
no connection  
no connection  
Brown-White  
Brown  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
8
42  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Installation  
FIG. 42 RJ-45 wiring diagram  
Connecting and Using USB Input Devices  
The CV7 panel can have up to two USB-capable input devices connected for use on its different  
firmware and TPD4 panel pages. These input devices can consist of a keyboard or mouse.  
USB-connected input devices are not detected and recognized by the panel until  
power is cycled to the unit.  
A mini-USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active  
panel. Connection to a previously powered panel, allows the PC to detect the  
panel and assign an appropriate USB driver.  
1. Insert the input device USB connectors into the appropriate USB connector on the panel.  
2. Press the on-screen Reboot button from the Protected Setup page to save any changes and  
restart the panel.  
3. After the panel splash-screen disappears:  
If a USB mouse has been connected, a mouse cursor appears on the panel screen and its  
location corresponds to the mouse cursor position sent by the external USB mouse.  
If a USB keyboard has been connected, only on-screen keyboards and keypads will  
reflect any external keystrokes sent from the external USB keyboard.  
43  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Installation  
44  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Panel Calibration  
Panel Calibration  
This section outlines the steps for calibrating the touch panel. It is recommended that you calibrate  
the panel before its initial use and after completing a firmware download.  
Modero panels are factory setup with specific demo touch panel pages. The first splash screen that  
appears indicates the panel is receiving power, beginning to load firmware, and preparing to display  
the default touch panel pages. When the panel is ready, the AMX Splash Screen is replaced by the  
Initial Panel Page (FIG. 43).  
AMX Splash Screen  
(appears during power-up)  
Initial Panel Page  
(AMX Logo Page)  
FIG. 43 AMX splash screen and initial Panel Page  
Calibrating the Modero Panel  
1. Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (FIG. 44) for 6 seconds to pass-over the  
Setup page and access the Calibration setup page (FIG. 45).  
Front Setup  
Access button (grey)  
3 second press/hold:  
Opens the Setup page  
6 second press/hold:  
Opens the Calibration page  
Single press puts  
the panel to sleep  
FIG. 44 Location of Front Setup Access button  
2. Press the crosshairs (on the Calibration page) to set the calibration points on the LCD  
(FIG. 45).  
45  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
         
Panel Calibration  
The request to touch the crosshairs  
is the first on-screen message  
Calibration successful is the second  
on-screen message that appears  
after the calibration process is  
completed  
On-screen crosshairs used for  
calibration of the touch device  
FIG. 45 Touch Panel Calibration Screens  
3. After the "Calibration Successful.." message appears, press anywhere on the screen to  
continue and return to the Setup page.  
If the calibration was improperly set and you cannot return to the Calibration  
page (through the panel’s firmware); you can then access this firmware page via  
G4 WebControl where you can navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the  
Calibrate button through your VNC window.  
This action causes the panel to go to the Calibration page seen above, where you  
can physically recalibrate the actual touch panel again using the above procedures.  
Testing your Calibration  
1. Press and hold down the on-screen Calibration button for 6 seconds to enter the Calibration  
On-screen crosshairs is used to  
verify a proper calibration of the  
panel  
FIG. 46 Calibration Test page  
2. Press anywhere on this page to confirm the on-screen crosshairs match your touch points.  
3. If the crosshairs do not appear directly below your LCD touch points, press the Back button  
and recalibrate the panel using the above steps.  
4. Exit this Calibration Test page by pressing the Back button to return to the Protected Setup  
page.  
46  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
Configuring Communication  
Communication between the Modero panel and the Master is done using either USB or  
ETHERNET (DHCP or Static IP). Ethernet communication can be achieved through either a  
direct connection (Ethernet) or through the use of the optional NXA-WC802.11B/CF wireless  
interface card.  
Before commencing, verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master firmware.  
Verify the NetLinx Studio program being used is Version 2.3 or higher.  
USB input devices must be plugged into the rear or side USB connectors before the  
G4 panel is powered-up. The panel will not detect a USB connection of this type until  
after the unit cycles power.  
Modero Setup and System Connection  
1. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page (FIG. 47).  
Connection Status  
Red Connection Status icon -  
indicates no connection  
to a Master  
Green Connection Status icon -  
indicates communication  
to a Master  
Battery Base button doesn’t appear  
until NXT is connected to a BASE/1  
FIG. 47 Setup page  
2. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the  
Protected Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
3. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
Clearing Password #5, from the initial Password Setup page, removes the need for  
you to enter the default password before accessing the Protected Setup page.  
4. Press the red Device Number field to open the Device Number keypad (FIG. 48).  
5. Enter a Device Number for the panel into the Device Number Keypad.  
The default is 10001 and the range is from 1 - 32000.  
When using multiple panels within a NetLinx System, remember to assign unique  
Device Number values to each panel so that all assigned panels appear in the  
System listing for the target Master.  
6. Press Done to close the keypad, assign the number, and return to the Protected Setup page.  
47  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
7. Press the on-screen Reboot button to restart the panel and incorporate any changes.  
FIG. 48 Protected Setup page  
Before continuing, open NetLinx Studio 2.3. This program assists in developing a  
System Number, Master IP/URL, and Master Port number. Refer to your NetLinx  
Master’s instruction manuals for more information.  
8. Obtain the System Number and Master IP Address from NetLinx Studio. This information  
must be specific for the system used with the configured Modero panel.  
9. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page.  
10. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the  
Protected Setup page.  
11. Press the System Connection button (located on the Protected Setup page) to open the System  
Connection page (FIG. 49) and begin configuring the communication settings on the panel to  
match those of the target Master.  
Modero  
connection  
information  
NetLinx Master’s  
connection  
information  
MAC Address  
from panel is  
factory set to a  
unique address  
FIG. 49 System Connection page  
There are 2 possible Master Connection Types available: USB or Ethernet.  
A USB connection type is a direct connection from the panel’s mini-USB port to a  
corresponding USB port on the PC (acting as a Virtual Master).  
An Ethernet connection type involves indirect communication from the panel to a  
Master via an Ethernet connection to the network.  
48  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Configuring Communication  
It is recommended that firmware KIT files only be transferred over a direct  
connection and only when the panel is connected to a power supply. If battery  
power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade, the panel flash  
file system may become corrupted.  
The mini-USB connector MUST be plugged into an already active panel before the  
PC can recognize the connection and assign an appropriate USB driver. This driver is  
part of both the NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 software application installations.  
Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master  
NetLinx Studio can be setup to run a Virtual Master where the PC acts as the Master by supplying  
its own IP Address for communication to the panel. The PC is first equipped with the USB driver,  
the panel is then configured for USB communication, and then Studio is configured to act as the  
Master.  
For a personal computer to establish a connection to a Modero panel via USB, the target computer  
must have the appropriate AMX USB driver installed. This installation is bundled into the latest  
TPDesign4 (version 2.5 or higher) software setup process or can be downloaded independently  
from the main Application Files page on www.amx.com.  
Step 1: Setup the Panel and PC for USB Communication  
1. If you do not currently have the latest version of TPDesign4, navigate to www.amx.com >  
Tech Center > Downloadable Files > Application Files > NetLinx Design Tools section of  
the website and locate the AMX USB Driver executable (AMX USBLAN Setup exe).  
2. Download this executable file to a known location on your computer.  
3. Launch the Setup.exe and follow the on-screen prompts to complete the installation.  
Step 2: Confirm the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC  
The first time each AMX touch panel is connected to the PC it is detected as a new hardware device  
and the USBLAN driver becomes associated with it (panel specific). Each time thereafter the panel  
is "recognized" as a unique USBLAN device and the association to the driver is done in the  
background. When the panel is detected for the first time some user intervention is required during  
the association between panel and driver.  
1. After the installation of the USB driver has been completed, confirm the proper installation of  
the large Type-A USB connector to the PC's USB port, and restart your machine.  
If the panel is already powered, continue with steps 3.  
The panel MUST be powered and configured for USB communication before  
connecting the mini-USB connector to the panel’s Program Port.  
2. Connect the terminal end of the PSN power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the  
rear/side of the panel and supply power.  
3. After the CV7 panel powers-up, press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button  
(for 3 seconds) to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.  
4. Select Protected Setup > System Connection (located on the lower-left) to open the System  
Connection page (FIG. 50).  
49  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
       
Configuring Communication  
No connection is established until  
the Virtual Master becomes  
active within Studio  
Red Connection Status icon -  
indicates no connection to a Virtual  
Master  
Green Connection Status icon -  
indicates communication to a Virtual  
Master  
FIG. 50 USB System Connection page - using a USB Connection Type  
5. Toggle the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to  
USB. Refer to the System Connection Page section on page 109 for more information about the  
fields on this page.  
ALL fields are then greyed-out and read-only, but still display any previous network  
information.  
6. Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page.  
7. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel. Remember  
that the panel’s connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to  
inserting the USB connector.  
8. ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page, THEN insert the mini-USB connector  
into the Program Port on the panel. It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new  
connection and send a signal to the PC (indicated by a green System Connection icon). If this is  
your first time installing the USB driver, a USB driver installation popup window (FIG. 51)  
appears on the PC.  
FIG. 51 USB driver installation popup window  
50  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
This window notifies you that the panel has been detected by the PC as a USB-compliant  
device and the PC is installing an appropriate USB driver to establish a proper  
communication to the panel.  
This driver was installed on your PC during the installation of the latest NetLinx Studio  
and TPDesign4 software application installations. These applications should be  
installed prior to setting up a USB connection to the panel.  
®
®
The driver does not contain a Microsoft digital signature and Windows then informs  
you of such.  
9. Click Yes when told that a digital signature was not found. This action accepts the installation  
of the new AMX USB driver. The panel is now configured to communicate directly with  
the PC.  
This process completes the association between driver and device.  
Each time the same touch panel is connected to the computer the driver is  
automatically loaded (using a unique name - example USB LAN LINK #1, #2).  
Each time a different touch panel is connected to the computer, the previous  
procedures will need to be repeated.  
10. Navigate back to the System Connection page.  
Step 3: Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections  
The USB driver information can be confirmed via two different methods:  
Via the Control panel (previous steps 1 and 2) or  
Via the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon from the Taskbar.  
1. Navigate to Start > Settings > Control Panel > and double-click the System icon to launch  
the System Properties dialog.  
2. Select the Hardware tab and click on the Device Manager button to launch the Device  
Manager dialog.  
Within the Device Manager dialog, the AMX USBLAN device appears under Network  
Adapters (FIG. 52) and has a unique name such as AMX USB LAN LINK #2. The  
number changes depending on which recognized panel is currently connected.  
3. Confirm that a new USB detection icon (FIG. 53) appears in the lower-right taskbar on the PC  
display window.  
4. Double-click on the icon to open the Unplug or Eject Hardware window and confirm the  
AMX USB LAN LINK has been installed and is operating properly.  
51  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
USB connected touch  
panel (showing the  
recognized panel)  
FIG. 52 Device Manager dialog showing USB device  
A Virtual NetLinx Master (VNM) is used when the target panel is not connected to a  
physical NetLinx Master. In this situation, the PC takes on the functions of a Master  
via a Virtual NetLinx Master. This connection is made by either using the PC’s  
Ethernet Address (via TCP/IP using a known PC’s IP Address as the Master) or  
using a direct mini-USB connection to communicate directly to the panel.  
5. Click the Properties button to view further information about the installed USB driver.  
USB  
detection  
icon  
FIG. 53 USB Properties windows  
If there is a yellow exclamation point next to the AMX USB LAN LINK device (within  
the hardware devices section of the Unplug or Eject Hardware window), stop and  
close the USB operation. Reconnect the USB cable to the panel and repeat the setup  
procedures. Refer to the Troubleshooting section on page 163 for more detailed  
information.  
To remove the USB driver association from a previously connected touch panel, you must  
navigate back to the Device Manager, right-click on the panel’s USB driver (example AMX USB  
LAN LINK #2) and select Uninstall from the context menu and then OK.  
Once the system completes the removal of the device, the Device Manager window will  
refresh, and the device will no longer appear.  
52  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
The next time this device is connected to the computer it will appear as a new hardware  
device and will need to be associated again with the driver (refer to Step 2: Confirm the  
Step 4: Use the USB to Configure a Virtual Master (using NetLinx Studio)  
When configuring your panel to communicate via USB with a Virtual Master (on your  
PC), ONLY the USB connection option must be selected within the Type field. Since  
this is a direct connection, the PC’s IP Address is not needed.  
Before beginning:  
1. Verify the panel has been configured to communicate via USB within the System Connection  
page and that the USB driver has been properly configured. Refer to the previous section for  
more information.  
2. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.3 (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc >  
NetLinx Studio > NetLinx Studio 2.3).  
3. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master  
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 54).  
IP Addresses of computer  
(not needed as this is a direct  
USB connection)  
FIG. 54 Assigning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master  
4. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.  
5. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate  
that you are working as a NetLinx Master.  
6. Click on the Virtual Master radio box (from the Transport Connection Option section) to  
indicate you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate directly with a panel. Everything  
else such as the Authentication is greyed-out because you are not going through the Master’s  
UI.  
7. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the Virtual  
NetLinx Master Settings dialog (FIG. 54).  
8. From within this dialog enter the System number (default is 1).  
53  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
9. Click OK three times to close the open dialogs, save your settings, and return to the main  
NetLinx Studio application.  
10. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual  
System. The default System value is one.  
11. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate  
the list.  
The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number (in the Online Tree  
tab) until both the system number used in step 7 for the VNM is entered into the Master  
Connection section of the System Connection page and the panel is restarted.  
The Connection status turns green after a few seconds to indicate an active USB  
connection to the PC (Virtual Master). No Lock icon is displayed because this USB  
connection is not secured (requiring a username/password).  
If the G4 panel does not appear, refer to the Troubleshooting section on page 163 for  
more information.  
If a few minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green,  
repeat the USB connection and Virtual Master setup procedures (outlined in this section).  
Refreshing the System sends out a request to the panel to respond and completes the  
communication (turning the System Connection icon green).  
Step 5: Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections  
Use the CC-USB Type-A to Mini-B 5-wire programming cable (FG10-5965) to provide  
communication between the mini-USB Program port on the touch panel and the PC. This method  
of communication is used to transfer firmware KIT files and TPD4 touch panel files.  
A mini-USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active  
panel. Connection to a previously powered panel which then reboots, allows  
the PC to detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver.  
1. Verify this direct USB connection (Type-A on the panel to mini-USB on the panel) is  
configured properly using the steps outlined in the previous two sections.  
2. With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within  
NetLinx Studio, its now time to verify the panel is ready to receive files.  
3. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual  
System. The default System value is one.  
4. Right-click on the System entry (A in FIG. 55) and select Refresh System. This causes a  
refresh of all project systems, establishes a new connection to the Virtual Master, and populates  
the System list with devices on your particular system.  
54  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
FIG. 55 Using USB for Virtual Master communication  
Secondary Connection Page - Wireless Access Overview  
IP Routing  
The behavior of the wireless routing is largely dependent on the wired network interface. Although  
the panel can be connected to two networks simultaneously it may only have one gateway. If the  
wired network was successfully set up and a gateway was obtained; then the default route for all  
network traffic will be via the wired network. In the event that the wired network was not  
configured, then the default route for all network traffic will be via the wireless network. The wired  
network connection always takes priority.  
As an example:  
Imagine a panel connected to two networks A & B. A is the wired network and B is the  
wireless network. If the Master controller is on either of these networks then it will be  
reached. However if the Master controller is on a different network, C, then determining  
which network interface (wired or wireless) that will be used is dependent on the  
gateway.  
Hot Swapping  
Hot swapping is not an issue on these panels as the card is installed within the unit and cannot be  
removed without first removing the housing.  
In the case of DHCP, there must be a DHCP server accessible before the fields are populated.  
If the SSID (Network Name) and WEP fields have not previously been configured, the  
Secondary Connection page will not work until the panel is rebooted.  
Ethernet Communication from the panel can be direct (using an Ethernet cable) or indirect (through  
the NXA-WC80211B/CF AMX Wireless Card communicating to a Wireless Access Point (WAP)  
such as the NXA-WAP200G). In determining the Ethernet method of communication, the panel  
will always default first to the direct Ethernet communication. If no direct connection is detected,  
the panel will first check to see if there is an installed wireless interface card and then communicate  
to the WAP using the Wireless Settings assigned within the Secondary Connection page. The WAP  
55  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
         
Configuring Communication  
communication parameters must match those of the pre-installed wireless interface card installed  
within the panel. The CV7 touch panels allow users to connect to a wireless network through their  
use of the optional AMX 802.11b wireless interface card. This internal card transmits data using  
the 802.11b signals at 2.4 GHz. Before beginning, there are several concepts that should be  
explained:  
Wireless Access Points are the cornerstone of any wireless network. A Wireless Access  
Point acts as a bridge between a wired and wireless network. It aggregates the traffic  
from all the wireless clients and forwards it down the network to the switch or router.  
One Wireless Access Point may be all you need. However, you could need more Wireless  
Access Points depending on either how large your installation is, how it is laid out, and  
how it is constructed.  
802.11b/2.4 GHz vs. 802.11a/5 GHz are the two major WLAN standards and both  
operate using radio frequency (RF) technology. Together the two standards are together  
called Wi-Fi and operate in frequency bands of 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz respectively.  
The 802.11b specification was the first to be finalized and reach the marketplace and at  
this time is the only specification supported by the Modero line of products. The actual  
throughput you can expect to obtain from an 802.11b network will typically be between  
4 and 5 Mbps.  
When indoors, 802.11b signals can travel as far as 150 meters (492 feet). The outdoor  
802.11b range is over three times greater; 500 meters (1640 feet, or nearly 1/3 of a mile).  
At either of these extreme ranges, the bandwidth available is at least 1Mbps. To operate  
in its maximum bandwidth mode of 11 Mbps, the distance indoors can be no more than  
50 meters (164 feet); outdoors it should be 250 meters (820 feet).  
Because of the higher frequency (and thus shorter wavelength) that they use, 802.11a  
signals have a much tougher time penetrating solid objects like walls, floors, and ceilings.  
As a result, the price for 802.11a's higher speed is not only shorter in range but also a  
weaker and less consistent signal.  
Wireless Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Security is a method by which WLANs protect  
wireless data streams. A data stream encrypted with WEP can still be intercepted or  
eavesdropped upon, but the encryption makes the data unintelligible to the interloper. The  
strength of WEP is measured by the length of the key used to encrypt the data. The longer  
the key, the harder it is to crack.  
802.11b implementations provided 40-bit and 104-bit WEP keys. This is known  
respectively as 64-bit and 128-bit WEP encryption. 64-bit is generally not regarded as  
adequate security protection. Both key lengths are supported by the Modero product line.  
Whichever level of WEP you use, it's crucial to use identical settings (CASE  
SENSITIVE)--the key length, and the key itself-- on all devices. Only devices with  
common WEP settings will be able to communicate. Similarly, if one device has WEP  
enabled and another doesn't, they won't be able to talk to each other.  
Although the calculations required to encrypt data with WEP can impact the performance  
of your wireless network, it's generally seen only when running benchmarks, and not  
large enough to be noticeable in the course of normal network usage.  
56  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Configuring Communication  
Configuring a Wireless Network Access  
When working with a wireless card, the first step is to configure wireless communication  
parameters within the Secondary Connection page. This page only configures the card to  
communicate to a target WAP (such as the NXA-WAP200G), it is still necessary to tell the panel  
which Master it should be communicating with. This "pointing to a Master" is done via the  
System Connection page where you configure the IP Address, System Number and  
Username/Password information assigned to the target Master.  
Step 1: Configure the Panel’s Wireless IP Settings  
The first step to successfully setting up your wireless card is to configure the IP Settings section on  
the Secondary Connection page. The section configures the communication parameters from the  
Modero panel to the web.  
Wireless communication using a DHCP Address  
1. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the  
Protected Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
2. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
3. Press the Secondary Connection button (located on the lower-left) to open the Secondary  
Connection page. Wireless communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page  
4. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to DHCP.  
This action causes all fields in the IP Settings section (other than Host Name) to be greyed-out.  
DHCP will register the unique MAC Address (factory assigned) on the panel and  
once the communication setup process is complete, assign IP Address, Subnet  
Mask, and Gateway values from the DHCP Server.  
5. Press the optional Host Name field to open a Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.  
Modero  
connection  
IP info.  
FIG. 56 Secondary Connection page (IP Settings section)  
6. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.  
7. Do not alter any of these remaining greyed-out fields in the IP Settings section. Once the panel  
is rebooted, these values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after  
power-up.  
57  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
         
Configuring Communication  
This information can be found in either the Workspace - System name > Define  
Device section of your code (that defines the properties for your panel), or in the  
Device Addressing/Network Addresses section of the Tools > NetLinx Diagnostics  
dialog.  
8. Setup the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target  
WAP by configuring the Wireless Settings section on this page. Refer to Step 2: Configure the  
secure or unsecure connection.  
Wireless communication using a Static IP Address  
1. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the  
Protected Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
2. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
3. Press the Secondary Connection button (located on the lower-left) to open the Secondary  
Connection page. Wireless communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page  
Check with your System Administrator for a pre-reserved Static IP Address assigned  
to the panel. This address must be obtained before Static assignment of the panel  
continues.  
4. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to Static.  
The IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields then become user-editable (red).  
5. Press the IP Address field to open a Keyboard and enter the Static IP Address (provided by  
your System Administrator).  
6. Press Done after you are finished entering the IP information.  
7. Repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway fields.  
8. Press the optional Host Name field to open the Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.  
9. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.  
10. Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard, enter the Primary DNS Address (provided by  
your System Administrator) and press Done when compete. Repeat this process for the  
Secondary DNS field.  
11. Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard, enter the resolvable domain Address (this is  
provided by your System Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel),  
and press Done when complete.  
12. Setup the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target  
WAP by configuring the Wireless Settings section on this page. Refer to the following section  
for detailed procedures to setup either a secure or unsecure connection.  
58  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Step 2: Configure the Card’s Wireless Security Settings  
The second step to successfully setting up your wireless card is to configure the Wireless Settings  
section of the Secondary Connection page. The section configures both the communication and  
security parameters from the internal wireless card to the WAP. The procedures outlined within the  
following sections use an NXA-WAP200G and the target WAP.  
Once you have completed setting up the wireless card parameters, you must then  
navigate to the System Connection page and configure the communication  
parameters for the target Master. Until those parameters are configured, your  
Connection Status icon will remain red (indicating that there is no current connection  
to a Master).  
Configuring the Modero’s wireless card for unsecured access to a WAP200G  
Prior to beginning the configuration of the wireless settings, verify that the panel has  
been upgraded to a wireless panel via the installation of the NXA-WC80211B/CF  
wireless interface card.  
1. Power-down the Modero unit and follow the wireless card installation procedures outlined in  
2. Power-up the panel (this allows it to detect the card).  
3. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the  
Protected Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
4. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
5. Press the Secondary Connection button (located on the lower-left) to open the Secondary  
Connection page.  
6. From within the Wireless Settings section of the Secondary Connection page, touch the  
Network Name (SSID) field (FIG. 57).  
Wireless card  
settings  
FIG. 57 Secondary Connection page (showing default values)  
7. From the Service Set Identifier keyboard, enter the SSID name used on your target Wireless  
Access Point (case sensitive).  
The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP. If this field is left blank, the  
unit will attempt to connect to the first available WAP. By default, all WAP200Gs use  
AMX as their assigned SSID value.  
59  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because  
the SSID was not entered properly. You must maintain the same case when entering the  
SSID information. ABC is not the same as Abc.  
8. Toggle the Authentication field to an Open System (default).  
Open System Authentication allows any device to join the network if the panel’s SSID  
matches the WAP’s SSID.  
9. Toggle the Encryption field until it reads Clear Text (default).  
The remaining Wireless Settings fields are then greyed-out and become read-only. All  
NXA-WAP200Gs are factory-shipped as an unsecured WAP with no WEP  
encryption. The WAP200G initial Status page will display the status of both the WEP  
and WPA (both disabled).  
10. Verify the fields in the IP Settings section have been properly configured. Refer to Step 1:  
11. Press the Back button to navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the on-screen Reboot  
button to both save any changes and restart the panel. Remember that you will need to  
navigate to the System Connection page and configure the connection to a target Master.  
12. After the panel restarts, return to the Secondary Connection page to verify the Link Quality  
and Signal Strength:  
The bargraphs have been replaced with descriptions: None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very  
Good, and Excellent (FIG. 57).  
The signal strength field should provide some descriptive text regarding the strength  
of the connection to a Wireless Access Point. If there is no signal or no IP Address  
displayed; configuration of your network could be required.  
Refer to the NXA-WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed setup and configuration  
procedures.  
Configuring the Modero’s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G  
After logging into the WAP200G, the default Status page appears within the web browser. These  
read-only values are "pulled" from some of the other user-configurable Configuration Utility pages.  
By default, wireless Modero panels are configured for unsecured communication to a Wireless  
Access Point. To properly setup both the WAP200G and panel for secure communication, you must  
first prepare the Modero panel and then use the information provided to fill out the fields within the  
WAP’s browser-based Basic Wireless Configuration page.  
Since the code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula, all panels  
will generate identical keys for the same Passphrase. The generators used on WAPs will not  
produce the same key as the Modero generator even if you use the same Passphrase. This is why  
we recommend creating the Current Key FIRST on the Modero and then entering that  
information into the appropriate WAP200G fields.  
1. Power-down the Modero unit and follow the wireless card installation procedures outlined in  
When configuring touch panels for wireless communication, verify that no Ethernet  
connector is installed within the panel before the unit is power cycled.  
60  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
2. Power-up the panel (this allows it to detect the card).  
3. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the  
Protected Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
4. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
5. Press the Secondary Connection button (located on the lower-left) to open the Secondary  
Connection page.  
6. Locate the Wireless Settings section of the Secondary Connection page (FIG. 58).  
SSID field  
Wireless card communication  
settings (for use with a target WAP)  
Changes on this page take  
effect after using the BACK  
button to return to the  
previous page  
FIG. 58 Secondary Connection page (Wireless Settings section)  
You must first take the SSID name, Current Key string value, and panel MAC Address  
information and then later enter it into the appropriate WAP dialog fields in order to  
"sync-up" the secure connection. These values must be identically reproduced on the  
target WAP.  
7. Touch the Network Name (SSID) field and from the Service Set Identifier keyboard, enter the  
SSID name you will be using on your target Wireless Access Point (case sensitive).  
The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP. If this field is left blank, the  
unit will attempt to connect to the first available WAP. By default, all WAP200Gs use  
AMX as their assigned SSID value.  
One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because  
the SSID was not entered properly. You must maintain the same case when entering the  
SSID information. ABC is not the same as Abc.  
The alpha-numeric string is by default AMX but can later be changed to any 32-character  
entry. This string must be duplicated within the Network Name (SSID) field on the WAP.  
As an example, if you use TECHPUBS as your SSID, you must match this word and  
the case within both the Network Name (SSID) field on the touch panel’s Network Name  
SSID field and on the WAP’s Basic Wireless Configuration page.  
8. Leave the Authentication field reading Open System (default).  
Open System Authentication allows any device to join the network if the panel’s SSID  
matches the WAP’s SSID. An Open System is recommended for communication  
between Modero panels and an NXA-WAP200G.  
61  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Shared Key Authentication requires that the panel and the Wireless Access Point have  
the same WEP Key to authenticate.  
9. Toggle the Encryption field (FIG. 58) until it reads WEP64 or WEP128. The 64/128 selection  
reflects the bit-level of encryption security. This WEP encryption level must match the  
encryption level being used on the WAP  
WEP will not work unless the same Default Key is set on both the panel and the  
Wireless Access Point.  
For example: if you have your Wireless Access Point set to default key 4 (which  
was 01:02:03:04:05), you must set the panel’s key 4 to 01:02:03:04:05.  
10. Toggle the Default Key field until the you’ve chosen a WEP Key value (from 1- 4) that  
matches what you’ll be using on your target WAP200G.  
These WEP Key identifier values must match for both devices.  
11. With the proper WEP Key value displayed, press the Generate button to launch the WEP  
Passphrase keyboard.  
If you are wanting to have your target WAP (other than a 200G) generate the Current Key -  
Do not press the Generate button and continue with Step 14.  
This keyboard allows you to enter a Passphrase (such as AMXPanel) and then  
AUTOMATICALLY generate a WEP key which is compatible only among Modero  
panels.  
The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula.  
Therefore, this same Passphrase generates identical keys when done on any Modero  
because they all use the same Modero-specific generator. The Passphrase generator  
is case sensitive.  
12. Within this on-screen WEP Passphrase keyboard (FIG. 59), enter a character string or word  
(such as AMXPanel) and press Done when you have finished.  
FIG. 59 WEP Passphrase Keyboard  
As an example, enter the word AMXPanel using a 128-bit hex digit encryption. After  
pressing Done, the on-screen Current Key field displays a long string of characters  
(separated by colons) which represents the encryption key equivalent to the word  
AMXPanel.  
62  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
This series of hex digits (26 hex digits for a 128-bit encryption key) should be  
entered as the Current Key into both the WAP and onto other communicating  
Modero panels by using the WEP Key dialog (FIG. 60).  
FIG. 60 WEP Key # Keyboard  
13. Write down this Current Key string value for later entry into your WAP’s WEP Key field  
(typically entered without colons) and into the communicating panel’s Current Key field  
14. If you are entering a Current Key generated either by your target WAP or another  
Modero panel, within the WEP Keys section, touch the Key # button to launch the WEP Key #  
keyboard (FIG. 60), enter the characters and press Done when finished.  
This Key value corresponds to the Default WEP Key number used on the Wireless Access  
Point and selected in the Default Key field described in the previous step.  
If your target Wireless Access Point does not support passphrase key  
generation and has previously been setup with a manually entered WEP KEY,  
you must manually enter that same WEP key on your panel.  
15. Verify the fields within the IP Settings section have been properly configured. Refer to Step 1:  
16. Press the Back button to navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the on-screen Reboot  
button to both save any changes and restart the panel. Remember that you will need to  
navigate to the System Connection page and configure the connection to a target Master.  
17. After the panel restarts, return to the Secondary Connection page to verify the Link Quality  
and Signal Strength:  
The bargraphs have been replaced with descriptions: None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very  
Good, and Excellent.  
The signal strength field provides some descriptive text regarding the strength of the  
connection to a Wireless Access Point. If there is no signal or no IP Address  
displayed; configuration of your network could be required.  
Refer to the NXA-WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed setup and configuration  
procedures.  
63  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Configuring multiple wireless Moderos to communicate to a target WAP200G  
1. For each communicating touch panel, complete all of the steps outlined within the previous  
2. Navigate back to the Wireless/Secondary Connection page on each panel.  
3. Verify that all communicating Modero panels are using the same SSID, encryption level,  
Default Key #, and an identical Current Key value.  
As an example, all panels should be set to Default Key #1 and be using aa:bb:cc..as the  
Current Key string value. This same Key value and Current Key string should be used on  
the target WAP.  
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on each panel. Using the same passphrase, generates the same key for all  
communicating Modero panels.  
Configuring a Wired Ethernet Connection  
It is necessary to tell the panel which Master it should be communicating with. This "pointing  
to a Master" is done via the System Connection page where you configure the IP Address, System  
Number and Username/Password information assigned to the target Master. If you have previously  
established a wireless connection to the Internet you must still navigate to the System Connection  
page and configure the communication parameters for the target Master. Until those parameters are  
configured, your Connection Status icon will remain red (indicating there is no current connection  
to a Master).  
If you have previously configured an internal wireless card for communication to the  
Internet, you do not need to configure the panel’s IP Settings fields and can skip the  
following Step 1.  
Step1: Configure the Panel’s Wired IP Settings  
There are only two available methods of communicating a target Master over the Internet: Wireless  
(via an internal card) or Wired (direct Ethernet connection). If you are not using an internal wireless  
card, you can only configure the connection parameters through the System Connection page. This  
type of communication can be established either via either a Dynamic IP Address (DHCP) or via a  
pre-reserved Static IP Address (typically provided by your System Administrator).  
IP Settings section - Configuring a DHCP Address over Ethernet  
1. Select Protected Setup > System Connection (located on the lower-left) to open the System  
Connection page.  
2. Locate the IP Settings section of this page.  
Even though the Host, Gateway, Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, and Domain fields  
appear on the two separate System Connection and Secondary Connection pages;  
the information populating these fields is identical.  
If the information within one of these fields is altered, the change is reflected on both  
pages within the altered field.  
Example: Domain is altered on Secondary Connection page, the value is then also  
changed within the Domain field of the System Connection page.  
3. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to DHCP.  
64  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
       
Configuring Communication  
DHCP will register the unique MAC Address (factory assigned) on the panel and  
once the communication setup process is complete, reserve an IP Address, Subnet  
Mask, and Gateway values from the DHCP Server.  
4. Press the optional Host Name field to open a Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.  
5. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.  
6. Do not alter any of the remaining greyed-out fields in the IP Settings section. Once the panel is  
rebooted, these values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power-up.  
This information can be found in either the: Workspace- System name > Define  
Device section of your code (that defines the properties for your panel), or in the  
Device Addressing/Network Addresses in the Tools > NetLinx Diagnostics dialog.  
7. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page.  
8. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel.  
IP Settings section - Configuring a Static IP Address over Ethernet  
1. Select Protected Setup > System Connection (located on the lower-left) to open the System  
Connection page.  
2. Locate the IP Settings section of this page.  
Check with your System Administrator for a pre-reserved Static IP Address assigned  
to the panel. This address must be obtained before Static assignment of the panel  
continues.  
3. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to Static.  
4. Press the IP Address field to open a Keyboard and enter the Static IP Address (provided by  
your System Administrator).  
5. Press Done after you are finished entering the IP information.  
6. Repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway fields.  
7. Press the optional Host Name field to open the Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.  
8. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.  
9. Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard, enter the Primary DNS Address (provided by  
your System Administrator) and press Done when compete. Repeat this process for the  
Secondary DNS field.  
10. Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard, enter the resolvable domain Address (this is  
provided by your System Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel),  
and press Done when complete.  
11. Navigate to the Master Connection section of this page to begin configuring the  
communication parameters for the target Master.  
65  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Step 2: Choose a Master Connection Mode Setting  
There are three Ethernet MODE settings used in the Master Connection section of the System  
Connection page. URL is the most common method.  
Master Connection MODE options:  
URL (Uniform Resource Locator) is the address that defines the route to a file on the Web or  
any other Internet facility.  
In this system, the panel acts as a "Client" and the Master acts as a Server (in that Clients attach  
to it).  
LISTEN sets the Modero panel to "listen" for broadcasts from the Master (using the panel IP from  
its URL list). In this system, the panel acts as a "Server" (in that Clients attach to it) and the  
Master acts as a "Client".  
AUTO is used to instruct the Modero to search for a Master that uses the same System Number  
(assigned within the Master Connection section) and resides on the same Subnet as itself. In this  
case, the Master has its UDP feature enabled.  
This UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a protocol within the TCP/IP protocol suite that is used in  
place of TCP when a reliable delivery is not required.  
This UDP enabling is done through a Telnet session on the Master. Refer to the particular NetLinx  
Master manual for more detailed information.  
Step 3: Configure an Ethernet Connection Type  
When using Ethernet as your communication method, the NetLinx Master must first  
be setup with either a Static IP or DHCP Address obtained from either NetLinx Studio  
or your System Administrator.  
Before beginning:  
1. Verify the panel has been configured to communicate either through an Ethernet cable  
(connected from either the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub) or to a wirelessly to the Wireless  
Access Point (WAP).  
Before commencing, verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master firmware.  
2. Verify that the NetLinx Master is receiving power and is communicating via an Ethernet  
connection with the PC running NetLinx Studio.  
3. Connect the terminal end of the PSN power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the  
rear/side of the touch panel.  
4. Verify the green Ethernet LED (from the rear Ethernet port on the Master) is illuminated  
(indicating a proper connection).  
5. Verify the yellow LED (from the rear Ethernet port on the Master) is blinking (indicating  
communication).  
6. After the panel powers-up, press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (for 3 seconds)  
to proceed to the Setup page.  
7. Select Protected Setup > System Connection (located on the lower-left) to open the System  
66  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
Obtained  
from  
NetLinx  
Master  
FIG. 61 System Connection page  
Master Connection section - Virtual Master communication over Ethernet  
When configuring your panel to communicate with a Virtual Master (on your PC) via  
Ethernet, the Master IP/URL field must be configured to match the IP Address of the  
PC and make sure to use the Virtual System value assigned to the Virtual Master  
within NetLinx Studio.  
Before beginning:  
1. Verify the panel has been configured to communicate either through an Ethernet cable  
(connected from either the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub) or wireless to the Wireless Access  
Point.  
2. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.3 (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc >  
NetLinx Studio > NetLinx Studio 2.3).  
3. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master  
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 62).  
Enter this IP  
into the  
Master IP/URL  
field on the  
System Connection  
IP Addresses of computer  
page  
(also obtained by using the  
Start > Run > cmd command)  
FIG. 62 Assigning Communication Settings and TCP/IP Settings for a Virtual Master  
4. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.  
67  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
5. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate  
that you are working as a NetLinx Master.  
6. Click on the Virtual Master radio box (from the Transport Connection Option section) to  
indicate you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate with a panel. Everything else  
such as the Authentication is greyed-out because you are not going through the Master’s UI.  
7. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the Virtual  
NetLinx Master Settings dialog (FIG. 62).  
8. From within this dialog enter the System number (default is 1) and note the IP Address of the  
target PC being used as the Virtual Master. This IP Address can also be obtained by following  
these procedures:  
On your PC, click Start > Run to open the Run dialog.  
Enter cmd into the Open field and click OK to open the command DOS prompt.  
From the C:\> command line, enter ipconfig to display the IP Address of the PC. This  
information is entered into the Master IP/URL field on the panel.  
9. Click OK three times to close the open dialogs, save your settings, and return to the main  
NetLinx Studio application.  
10. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual  
System. The default System value is one.  
11. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate  
the list.  
12. Power-up your panel and press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (for 3 seconds) to  
continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.  
13. Select Protected Setup > System Connection (located on the lower-left) to open the System  
The System Number is  
assigned to the Master  
within the AMX  
software application  
(these must match)  
Enter the IP Address  
information of the PC  
used as a Virtual  
Master  
When using a Virtual Master,  
there is no need to enter a  
username and/or password  
FIG. 63 Sample System Connection page (for Virtual Master communication)  
14. Press the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to the  
word Ethernet.  
15. Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL.  
68  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
By selecting URL, the System Number field becomes read-only (grey) because the panel  
pulls this value directly from the communicating target Master (virtual or not). A Virtual  
Master system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as:  
NetLinx Studio, TPD4, or IREdit.  
16. Press the Master IP/URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the IP Address of the PC used as  
the Virtual Master.  
17. Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Connection page.  
18. Do not alter the Master Port Number value (this is the default value used by NetLinx).  
19. Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page.  
20. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel.  
Master Connection section - NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address - URL Mode  
In this mode, enter the System Number (zero for an unknown System Number) and the IP/URL of  
the Master (Master Port Number is defaulted to 1319).  
1. Press the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to the  
word Ethernet (FIG. 63). Refer to the System Connection Page section on page 109 for more  
information about the fields on this page.  
2. Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL.  
By selecting URL, the System Number field becomes read-only (grey) because the panel  
pulls this value directly from the communicating target Master (virtual or not). A Virtual  
Master system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as:  
NetLinx Studio, TPD4, or IREdit.  
If the panel does not appear within the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window of  
NetLinx Studio, check to make sure that the NetLinx Master System Number (from  
within the Device Addressing dialog) is correctly assigned.  
3. Press the Master IP/URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the Master IP Address (obtained  
from the Diagnostics - Networking Address dialog of the NetLinx Studio application).  
4. Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Connection page.  
5. Do not alter the Master Port Number value (this is the default value used by NetLinx).  
6. Enter a username and password (into their respective fields) if the target Master has been  
previously secured.  
7. Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page.  
8. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel.  
69  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Master Connection section - NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address - Listen Mode  
In this mode, you must add the Modero panel IP Address into the URL List of the Master (using  
NetLinx Studio). This mode sets the Modero panel to "listen" for broadcasts from the Master (using  
the panel IP from its URL list).  
1. Obtain either a Static IP for the Modero panel (from your System Administrator) or a DHCP  
Address from the IP Settings of the System Connection page.  
The DHCP/Static field (in the IP Settings section of the System Connection page) must  
be set to DHCP to get Dynamic IP information for the panel.  
Press the on-screen Reboot (from the Protected Setup page) to both save any changes and  
restart the panel.  
After power-up, press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to access the  
Setup page.  
Navigate to the Setup > Protected Setup > System Connection page and note the newly  
obtained Dynamic IP Address information from the IP Settings section. This information  
is then entered into the URL List for the connected NetLinx Master.  
2. Toggle the Type field until Ethernet is selected (from the Master Connection section of the  
System Connection page).  
3. Press the Mode field (to set the connection Mode) until the choice cycles to the word Listen.  
The System Number and Master IP/URL fields are then greyed-out.  
4. Enter a username and password (into their respective fields) if the target Master has been  
previously secured.  
5. Select the OnLine Tree tab from the Workspace window.  
6. Select Diagnostics > URL Listing from the Main menu (FIG. 64).  
System Address  
reflects the value  
set in the Device  
Addressing tab  
Used to obtain an  
existing URL  
List from Master  
Used to set the  
URL List  
on Master  
FIG. 64 URL List dialog  
7. Enter the System and Device number for the specific Master associated with your panel (as  
seen in the OnLine Tree tab).  
8. Click Add and enter the IP Address of the Modero touch panel into the Add URL dialog.  
9. Click OK to enter your IP Address and add it to the list.  
10. Click Done once you are finished adding your panel information to the list.  
70  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
11. Press the on-screen Reboot button to save any changes and restart the panel.  
Master Connection section - NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address - Auto Mode  
In this mode, enter the System Number of the NetLinx Master. This mode instructs the Modero to  
search for a Master that uses the same System Number (assigned within the Master Connection  
section) and resides on the same Subnet as itself.  
1. Toggle the blue Type field until Ethernet is selected (from the Master Connection section of  
the System Connection page).  
2. Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word Auto.  
3. Press the System Number field to launch a Keypad and enter the value for the system number of  
the NetLinx Master. This value can be obtained from the NetLinx Studio program > OnLine  
Tree of the Workspace window.  
4. Do not alter the IP Settings section, of the System Connection page, as these fields are not  
applicable to this connection mode.  
5. Enter a username and password (into their respective fields) if the target Master has been  
previously secured.  
6. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel.  
7. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page and confirm  
there is an active connection.  
The NetLinx Master and the Modero panel must both be on the same Subnet.  
Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel  
The G4 Web Control feature allows you to use a PC to interact with a G4 enabled panel via the web.  
This feature works in tandem with the new browser-capable NetLinx Security firmware update  
(build 300 or higher). G4 Web Control is only available with the latest Modero panel firmware.  
Refer to the G4 Web Control Page section on page 100 for more detailed field information.  
Verify your NetLinx Master (ME260/64 or NI-Series) has been installed with the latest  
firmware KIT file from www.amx.com. Refer to your NetLinx Master instruction  
manual for more detailed information on the use of the new web-based NetLinx  
Security.  
1. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page.  
2. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the  
Protected Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
3. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field (1988 is the default password).  
Clearing Password #5, from the initial Password Setup page, removes the need for  
you to enter the default password before accessing the Protected Setup page.  
4. Press Done when finished.  
5. Press the G4 WebControl button to open the G4 Web Control page (FIG. 65).  
71  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
FIG. 65 G4 Web Control page  
6. Press the Enable/Enabled button until it toggles to Enabled (light blue color).  
7. The Network Interface Select field is read-only and displays the method of communication to  
the web. Verify you have selected the proper interface connection as this field does not  
auto-detect the connection type being used (see below).  
Wired is used when a direct Ethernet connection is being used for communication to the  
web. This is the default setting if either no wireless interface card is detected or if both an  
Ethernet and wireless card connection is detected by the panel.  
Wireless is used when a wireless card is detected within the internal card slot. This  
method provides an indirect communication to the web via a pre-configured Wireless  
Access Point.  
8. Press the Web Control Name field to open the Web Name keyboard.  
9. From the Web Name keyboard, enter a unique alpha-numeric string to identify this panel. This  
information is used by the NetLinx Security Web Server to display on-screen links to the panel.  
The on-screen links use the IP Address of the panel and not the name for communication  
FIG. 66 Sample relationship between G4 Web Control and NetLinx Security-Mange WebControls window  
10. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string for the Web Control  
name.  
11. Press the Web Control Password field to open the Web Password keyboard.  
72  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
12. From the Web Password keyboard, enter a unique alpha-numeric string to be assigned as the  
G4 Authentication session password associated with VNC web access of this panel.  
13. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string for the Web Control  
password.  
14. Press the Web Control Port field to open the Web Port Number keypad.  
15. Within the keypad, enter a unique numeric value to be assigned to the port the VNC Web  
Server is running on. The default value is 5900.  
16. Press Done when you are finished entering the value. The remaining fields within the G4 Web  
Control Settings section of this page are read-only and cannot be altered.  
17. Press the Up/Down arrows on either sides of the G4 Web Control Timeout field to increase or  
decrease the amount of time the panel can remain idle (no cursor movements) before the  
session is closed and the user is disconnected.  
18. Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page.  
19. Press the on-screen Reboot button to save any changes and restart the panel.  
Verify your NetLinx Master’s IP Address and System Number have been properly  
entered into the Master Connection section of the System Connection page.  
Accessing the NetLinx Master via an IP Address  
Refer to your particular NetLinx Master’s instruction manual for detailed information on how to  
download the latest firmware (build 300 or higher) from www.amx.com. This firmware build  
enables SSL security and disables the ability to alter the Master security properties via a TELNET  
session.  
Once the Master’s IP Address has been set through NetLinx Studio:  
1. Launch your web browser.  
2. Enter the IP Address of the target NetLinx Master (with either http or https) into your web  
browser’s Address field.  
3. Click OK to accept the AMX SSL certificate (if SSL is enabled).  
4. Enter a valid username and password into the fields within the Login dialog.  
5. Press the Enter key on your keyboard to begin the communication process between the target  
Master and your PC.  
6. The first window displayed (FIG. 67) is accessed by clicking on the Manage connections link.  
Once activated, this page displays links to G4 panels running the latest G4 Web Control  
feature.  
73  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Compatible  
devices field  
(showing G4  
WebControl links)  
G4 panels  
Compression  
Options  
FIG. 67 WebControls window (populated with panels)  
Using your NetLinx Master to Control the G4 panel  
Once the Master’s IP Address has been set through NetLinx Studio (version 2.3 or higher):  
1. Follow the procedures mentioned above to communicate to the target NetLinx Master through  
an IP Address.  
2. Enter a valid user name and password into the fields within the Login dialog.  
3. Click OK to enter the information and proceed to the Master’s Manage WebControls window.  
4. Press the Enter key on your keyboard to begin the communication process between the target  
Master and your PC.  
If a Security Alert window appears on your computer screen, refer to the specific NetLinx Master  
instruction manual for detailed information regarding this popup window. These steps are based on  
a Master with proper security and SSL encryption enabled.  
5. Click on the G4 panel name link associated with the target panel. A secondary web browser  
window then appears on the screen (FIG. 68).  
FIG. 68 Web Control VNC installation and Password entry screens  
74  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
6. Click Yes from the Security Warning popup window to agree to the installation of the G4 Web  
Control application on your computer. This application contains the necessary Active X and  
VNC client applications necessary to properly view and control the panel pages from your  
computer.  
The G4 Web Control application is sent by the panel to the computer that is used for  
communication. Once the application is installed, this popup will no longer appear.  
This popup will only appear if you are connecting to the target panel using a different  
computer.  
7. In some cases, you might get a Connection Details dialog (FIG. 69) requesting a VNC Server  
IP Address. This is the IP Address not the IP of the Master but of the target touch panel.  
Depending on which method of communication you are using, it can be found in either the:  
Wired Ethernet - System Connection > IP Settings section within the IP Address field.  
Wireless - Secondary Connection > IP Settings section within the IP Address field.  
If you do not get this field continue to step 8.  
IP Address of touch panel  
- obtained from IP Settings section of  
the System Connection page  
FIG. 69 Connection Details dialog  
8. If a Web Control password was setup on the G4 Web Control page, a G4 Authentication  
Session password dialog box (FIG. 68) appears on the screen within the secondary browser  
window.  
9. Enter the Web Control session password into the Session password field (FIG. 68). This  
password was previously entered into the Web Control Password field within the G4 Web  
Control page on the panel.  
10. Click OK to send the password to the panel and begin the session. A confirmation message  
appears stating "Please wait, Initial screen loading..".  
The secondary window then becomes populated with the same G4 page being displayed on the  
target G4 panel. A small circle appears within the on-screen G4 panel page and corresponds to the  
location of the mouse cursor. A left-mouse click on the computer-displayed panel page equates to  
an actual touch on the target G4 panel page.  
75  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
76  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Before beginning the Upgrade process:  
Setup and configure your NetLinx Master. Refer to the your particular NetLinx Master  
Instruction Manual for detailed setup procedures.  
Calibrate and prepare the communication pages on the Modero panel for use. Refer to the  
Refer to the NetLinx Studio version 2.3 or higher Help file for more information on  
uploading files via Ethernet.  
Configure your panel for either direct connect or wireless communication. Refer to the  
It is recommended that firmware KIT files only be transferred over a direct  
Ethernet connection and only when the panel is connected to a power supply.  
If battery power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade, the  
panel flash file system may become corrupted.  
The process of updating firmware involves the use of a communicating NetLinx Master. The  
required steps for updating firmware to a Modero panel are virtually identical to those necessary for  
updating KIT files to a NetLinx Master (except the target device is a panel instead of a Master).  
Refer to either your Master’s literature or Studio 2.3 Help file for those procedures.  
A touch panel which is not using a valid username and password will not be able to  
communicate with a secured Master. If you are updating the firmware on or through a  
panel which is not using a username or password field, you must first remove the  
Master Security feature to establish an unsecured connection.  
Upgrading the Modero Firmware via the USB port  
Before beginning with this section, verify your panel is both powered and the Type-A USB  
connector is securely inserted into the PC’s USB port. The panel must be powered-on before  
connecting the mini-USB connector to the panel.  
Establishing a USB connection between the PC and the panel, prior to installing the  
latest NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 applications will cause a failure in the USB  
driver installation.  
This driver must first be saved to the PC as part of the new NetLinx Studio and  
TPDesign4 application installations.  
Step 1: Configure the panel for a USB Connection Type  
1. After the installation of the USB driver has been completed; confirm the proper installation of  
the large Type-A USB connector to the PC's USB port, and restart your machine.  
2. After the CV7 panel powers-up, press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button  
(for 3 seconds) to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.  
3. Select Protected Setup > System Connection (located on the lower-left) to open the System  
Connection page.  
77  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
4. Toggle the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to  
USB.  
ALL fields are then greyed-out and read-only, but still display any previous network  
information.  
5. Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page.  
6. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel. Remember  
that the panel’s connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to  
inserting the USB connector.  
7. ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page, THEN insert the mini-USB connector  
into the Program Port on the panel. It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new  
connection and send a signal to the PC (indicated by a green System Connection icon).  
If a few minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green,  
complete the procedures in the following section to setup the Virtual Master and refresh  
the System from the Online Tree. This action sends out a request to the panel to respond  
and completes the communication (turning the System Connection icon green).  
8. Navigate back to the System Connection page.  
Step 2: Prepare NetLinx Studio for communication via the USB port  
1. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.3 (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc >  
NetLinx Studio > NetLinx Studio 2.3).  
2. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master  
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 70).  
IP Address of computer  
(not needed as this is a direct  
USB connection)  
FIG. 70 Assigning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master  
3. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.  
4. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate  
that you are working as a NetLinx Master.  
78  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
5. Click on the Virtual Master radio box (from the Transport Connection Option section) to  
indicate you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate directly with a panel. Everything  
else such as the Authentication is greyed-out because you are not going through the Master’s  
UI.  
6. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the Virtual  
NetLinx Master Settings dialog (FIG. 70).  
7. From within this dialog enter the System number (default is 1).  
8. Click OK three times to close the open dialogs, save your settings, and return to the main  
NetLinx Studio application.  
9. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual  
System. The default System value is one.  
10. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate  
the list.  
The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number (in the Online Tree  
tab) until both the system number used in step 7 for the Virtual NetLinx Master (VNM) is  
entered into the Master Connection section of the System Connection page and the panel is  
restarted.  
If the G4 panel does not appear, refer to the Troubleshooting section on page 163 for  
more information.  
Step 3: Confirm and Upgrade the firmware via the USB port  
Use the CC-USB Type-A to Mini-B 5-wire programming cable (FG10-5965) to provide  
communication between the mini-USB Program port on the touch panel and the PC. This method  
of communication is used to transfer firmware KIT files and TPD4 touch panel files.  
A mini-USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active  
panel. Connection to a previously powered panel which then reboots, allows  
the PC to detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver.  
1. Verify this direct USB connection (Type-A on the panel to mini-USB on the panel) is  
configured properly using the steps outlined in the previous two sections.  
2. With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within  
NetLinx Studio, its now time to verify the panel is ready to receive files.  
3. After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between  
the Virtual Master and the panel, click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window  
(FIG. 71) to view the devices on the Virtual System. The default System value is one.  
4. Right-click on the System entry (FIG. 71) and select Refresh System to re-populate the list.  
Verify the panel appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window.  
The default Modero panel value is 10001.  
79  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Showing the Virtual Master  
firmware version and  
device number  
Shows NetLinx Studio  
version number  
Showing the current Modero  
panel firmware version and  
device number  
FIG. 71 NetLinx Workspace window (showing the panel connection via a Virtual NetLinx Master)  
The panel firmware is shown on the right of the listed panel.  
Download the latest firmware file from www.amx.com and then save the KIT file to  
your computer.  
5. If the panel firmware version is not the latest available; locate the latest firmware file from the  
www.amx.com > Tech Center > Downloadable Files > Firmware Files > Modero Panels  
section of the website.  
6. Download the appropriate KIT file to your computer.  
7. Verify you have downloaded the latest Modero firmware (KIT) file to a known location.  
8. Select Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device from the Main menu to open  
the Send to NetLinx Device dialog (B in FIG. 72). Verify the panel’s System and Device  
number values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of  
the Workspace window (A in FIG. 72).  
B
A
FIG. 72 Using USB for a Virtual Master transfer  
9. Select the panel’s KIT file from the Files section.  
10. Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the  
Master (listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window). The Port field is greyed-out.  
80  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
11. Click the Reboot Device checkbox. This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware  
update process is complete. The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware  
process has finished.  
12. Click Send to begin the transfer. The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom-right of  
the dialog (B in FIG. 72).  
13. As the panel is rebooting, temporarily unplug the USB connector on the panel until the panel  
has completely restarted.  
14. Once the first panel page has been displayed, reconnect the USB connector to the panel.  
15. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of  
all project systems, establishes a new connection to the Master, and populates the System list  
with devices on your particular system.  
16. Confirm the panel has been properly updated to the correct firmware version.  
Upgrading the Modero Firmware via Ethernet (IP Address)  
Before beginning with this section, verify that your panel is powered and connected to the NetLinx  
Master through an Ethernet connection (direct or wireless).  
Step 1: Prepare the Master for communication via an IP  
1. Obtain the IP Address of the NetLinx Master from your System Administrator. If you do not  
have an IP Address for the Master, refer to your particular Master’s instruction manual for  
more information on obtaining this IP Address using NetLinx Studio 2.3 or higher.  
From the Online Tree tab of the Workspace window, select the NetLinx Master.  
Follow steps outlined in either the Obtaining or Assigning the Master’s IP Address  
sections from your particular NetLinx Master instruction manual to use an address.  
Note the IP Address and Gateway information.  
2. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.3 (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc >  
NetLinx Studio > NetLinx Studio 2.3).  
3. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master  
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 73).  
4. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.  
5. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate  
that you are working with a NetLinx Master (such as the NXC-ME260/64 or NI-Series of  
Integrated Controllers).  
6. Click on the Authentication Required radio box (if the Master is secured) and then enter a  
username and password.  
7. Click on the TCP/IP radio button (from the Transport Connection Option section) to indicate  
you are connecting to the Master through an IP Address.  
8. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the TCP/IP  
Settings dialog (FIG. 73).  
81  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
List of previously saved IP Addresses  
FIG. 73 Assigning Communication Settings and TCP/IP Settings  
9. From within the TCP/IP dialog click New to enter the IP information for a new IP Address or  
select from the list of previously entered IP Address and alter their properties by clicking the  
Edit button and making your changes.  
10. Enter the IP Address into the TCP/IP Address field. This information is obtained from either  
your System Administrator or obtained from the Master.  
11. Click OK when you are done adding or editing the IP Address from the New/Edit TCP/IP  
Setting dialog.  
12. Click OK three more times to close the open dialogs and save your settings.  
13. Click Yes to interrupt the current communication from the Master and apply the new settings.  
14. Select Tools > Reboot the Master Controller to access the Reboot the Master dialog, then  
click Reboot to reboot the Master and incorporate any changes.  
15. Once the dialog replies with "Reboot of system complete", press Done.  
16. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System. The  
default System value is one.  
17. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate  
the list.  
Step 2: Prepare the panel for communication via an IP  
1. Press the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to the  
word Ethernet.  
2. Press the blue Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL.  
By selecting URL, the System Number field becomes read-only (grey) because the panel  
pulls this value directly from the communicating target Master (virtual or not). A Virtual  
Master system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as:  
NetLinx Studio, TPD4, or IREdit.  
3. Press the red Master IP/URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the NetLinx Master’s  
IP Address (obtained from the Diagnostics - Networking Address dialog of the NetLinx  
Studio application).  
82  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
4. Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Configuration page.  
5. Do not alter the Master Port Number value (this is the default value used by NetLinx).  
6. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the on-screen Reboot  
button to restart the panel and save any changes.  
Step 3: Verify and Upgrade the panel firmware via an IP  
1. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System. The  
default System value is one.  
2. Right-click the associated System number (from the Workspace window) and select Refresh  
System to detect of all devices on the current system, establish a new connection to the Master,  
and refresh the System list with devices on that system.  
3. After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between  
the PC and the Master, verify the panel appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace  
window (FIG. 74). The default Modero panel value is 10001.  
Showing the NetLinx Master  
firmware version and  
device number  
Showing the current Modero  
panel firmware version and  
device number  
Shows NetLinx Studio  
version number  
FIG. 74 NetLinx Workspace window (showing connected Modero panel)  
The panel firmware is shown on the right of the listed panel. New G4 firmware  
features are available with firmware beginning with v2.XX.  
4. If the panel firmware version is not the latest available; locate the latest firmware file from the  
www.amx.com > Tech Center > Downloadable Files > Firmware Files > Modero Panels  
section of the website.  
5. Download the appropriate KIT file to your computer.  
6. Verify you have downloaded the latest Modero firmware (KIT) file to a known location.  
7. Select Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device from the Main menu to open  
the Send to NetLinx Device dialog (FIG. 75). Verify the panel’s System and Device number  
values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the  
Workspace window.  
8. Select the panel’s KIT file from the Files section (FIG. 75).  
9. Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the  
Master (listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window). The Port field is greyed-out.  
83  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Selected Firmware file  
Description field for selected KIT file  
Firmware download  
status  
Device and System values  
listed in the Workspace window  
must match the System and Device values  
FIG. 75 Send to NetLinx Device dialog (showing Modero firmware update via IP)  
10. Click the Reboot Device checkbox. This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware  
update process is complete. The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware  
process has finished.  
11. Click Send to begin the transfer. The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom-right of  
the dialog (FIG. 75).  
12. Click Close (after the panel reboots) to return to the main program.  
13. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of  
all project systems, establishes a new connection to the Master, and populates the System list  
with devices on your particular system.  
14. Confirm the panel has been properly updated to the correct firmware version.  
84  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
This section describes each firmware page and their specific functional elements.  
Setup Navigation Buttons  
These Setup Navigation Buttons (FIG. 76) appear on the left of the panel screen when the Setup  
page is currently active.  
Modero Setup  
Navigation Buttons  
FIG. 76 Setup Navigation Buttons  
These Navigation Buttons are specific to these Modero panels and include the specific elements  
described in the following table:  
Setup Navigation Button Elements  
Project Information:  
Press the Project Information button to access the Project Information and view  
the TPD4 project file properties currently loaded on the selected panel  
(read-only).  
• Refer to the Project Information Page section on page 88 for more detailed  
information.  
Panel Information:  
Time Adjustment:  
Audio Adjustments:  
Press the Panel Information button to access the Panel Information page and  
view panel specific information such as resolution, memory, etc. (read-only).  
• Refer to the Panel Information Page section on page 89 for more detailed  
information.  
Press the Time Adjustment button to access the Time Adjustment page where  
you can alter the time and date settings on the Master.  
• Refer to the Time & Date Setup Page section on page 90 for more detailed  
information.  
Press the Audio Adjustments button to access the Volume page where you can  
alter the audio parameters on the Modero panel.  
• Refer to the Volume Page section on page 92 for more detailed information.  
85  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Setup Navigation Button Elements (Cont.)  
Protected Setup:  
Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page section  
that provides access to the panel’s sensors, calibration features, and  
connection settings.  
Protected Setup Page section on page 98 for more detailed information.  
Video Adjustment:  
Press the Video Adjustment button to access the Video Adjustment page where  
you can set the video properties for incoming video.  
• This button only appears on Color Video (CV) capable touch panels.  
• Refer to the Video Adjustment Page section on page 93 for more detailed  
information.  
Battery Base:  
Press the Battery Base button to access the Battery Base page where you can  
modify and monitor NXT-BP Modero Power Pack parameters.  
• This button only appears when a Modero Table Top panel (NXT) is connected  
to an NXA-BASE/B battery base.  
• Refer to the Battery Base Page section on page 95 for more detailed  
information.  
Setup Page  
This page (FIG. 77) centers around basic Modero panel properties such as: Connection Status of  
the panel, Display Timeout, Inactivity Page Flip Time, Inactivity page file, and the Panel  
Brightness.  
Connection Status  
Red Connection Status icon -  
indicates no connection  
to a Master  
Green Connection Status icon -  
indicates communication  
to a Master  
Battery Base button doesn’t appear  
until NXT is connected to a BASE/1  
FIG. 77 Setup page  
The elements of the Setup page are described in the table below:  
Setup Page Elements  
Exit:  
Returns you to the Main touch panel page. In this case, the previous page is the  
default Main page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
86  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Setup Page Elements (Cont.)  
Connection Status:  
Displays whether the panel is communicating externally, the encryption status  
of the communicating Master, what connection type is being used (Ethernet or  
USB), and what System the panel is a part of.  
This visual display of the connection status is also reflected at the upper-right of  
each firmware page. This allows the user to have a current visual update of the  
panel’s connection status regardless of what page is currently active.  
• When a connection is established, the message displayed is either:  
"Connected via Ethernet " or "Connected via USB ".  
• If no connection can be established by the Modero panel, it will continue to try  
and establish a connection while displaying: "Attempting via ...".  
• The word "Encrypted" appears only when an encrypted connection is  
established with a target Master.  
• The panel must be rebooted before incorporating any panel communication  
changes and detecting any active Ethernet connections.  
The Ethernet connection is not detected until after a reboot.  
Display/Panel Timeout:  
Sets the length of time the panel can remain idle before activating the sleep  
mode. When the device goes into sleep mode, the LCD is powered-down.  
• Press the UP/DN buttons to increase/decrease the time until the panel  
times out. Range = 0 - 240 minutes.  
• Use this button to set the timeout value to zero and disable the sleep mode.  
• Note: Display timeout values affect battery performance. Small timeout  
values increase the life of the battery charge. Greater timeout values  
may require more frequent battery charging.  
Inactivity Page Flip  
Timeout:  
Sets the number of minutes of inactivity before the panel automatically flips to a  
pre-selected touch panel page. When the device goes into this inactivity mode,  
the LCD does not power-down.  
• Press the UP/DN buttons to increase/decrease the time the panel can remain  
inactive before it flips to the preset page. Range = 0 - 240 minutes.  
• Use this button to set the timeout value to zero and disable the inactivity page  
flip mode.  
• The touch panel page used for the Inactivity page flip is shown within a small  
Inactivity Page field.  
Panel Brightness:  
Sets the display brightness level of the panel.  
• Press the UP/DN buttons to adjust the brightness level. Range = 0 - 100.  
• The on-screen bargraph can be dragged to adjust the Brightness level which  
is then reflected as a corresponding numeric value within the Panel  
Brightness field.  
87  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Project Information Page  
The Project Information page displays the TPDesign4 (TPD4) project file properties currently  
loaded on the selected Modero panel (FIG. 78). Refer to the TPDesign4 Touch Panel Program  
instruction manual for more specific information on uploading TPDesign4 files to a panel.  
FIG. 78 Project Information page (showing the TPD4 project properties tabs)  
The elements of the Project Information page are described in the table below:  
Project Information Page Elements  
Back:  
Returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
File Name:  
Displays the name of the TPDesign4 project file downloaded to the panel.  
Displays the designer information.  
Designer ID:  
File Revision:  
Dealer ID:  
Displays the revision number of the file.  
Displays the dealer ID number (unique to every dealer and entered in TPD4).  
Displays the job name.  
Job Name:  
Sales Order:  
Purchase Order:  
Displays the sales order information.  
Displays the purchase order information.  
AMX IR 38k Assigned Port: Displays the AMX 38 kHz IR channel port used by the IR receiver on the panel.  
• This information is pulled by the panel from AMX IR Receivers section of the  
TPD4 Project Properties > IR Emitters & Receivers tab.  
• For IR reception, this is the port that reports a push on for the corresponding  
IR code.  
• IR receivers and transmitters on G4 panels share the device address number  
of the panel.  
88  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Project Information Page Elements (Cont.)  
AMX IR 455k  
Assigned Port:  
Displays the AMX 455 kHz IR channel port used by the IR receiver on the  
panel.  
This information is pulled by the panel from AMX IR Receivers section of the  
TPD4 Project Properties > IR Emitters & Receivers tab.  
• For IR reception, this is the port that reports a push on for the corresponding  
IR code.  
• IR receivers and transmitters on G4 panels share the device address number  
of the panel.  
Build Number:  
Displays the build number information of the TPD4 software used to create the  
project file.  
Creation Date:  
Revision Date:  
Last Save Date:  
Blink Rate:  
Displays the project creation date.  
Displays the last revision date for the project.  
Displays the last date the project was saved.  
Displays the feedback blink rate (10th of second).  
Job Comments:  
Displays any comments associated to the job. These comments are taken from  
the TPD4 project file.  
Panel Information Page  
The Panel Information page (FIG. 79) centers around Modero panel properties such as: resolution  
used, on-board memory, firmware, address/channel information, and string information.  
This information is retrieved  
from the Modero panel  
FIG. 79 Panel Information page (takes its’ information from the touch panel)  
The elements of the Panel Information page are described in the table below:  
Panel Information Page Elements  
Back:  
Returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Panel Type:  
Displays the model of the Modero panel being used.  
Displays the G4 firmware version being used by the panel.  
• Verify you have the latest version from www.amx.com.  
Firmware Version:  
89  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Panel Information Page Elements (Cont.)  
Setup Port:  
Displays the setup port information/value being used by the panel.  
Displays the high port (port count) value for the panel.  
High Port:  
High Address:  
High Channel:  
High Level:  
Displays the high address (address count) value for the panel.  
Displays the high channel (channel count) value for the panel.  
Displays the high level (level count) value being used by the panel.  
Displays the specific serial number value assigned to the panel.  
Displays the type and version of the Setup pages being used by the panel.  
Serial Number:  
Setup Pages Version:  
Screen Width:  
Displays the pixel width being used to display the incoming video signal on the  
Modero panel.  
• Maximum available screen width on a CV7 Modero panel is 800 pixels.  
Screen Height:  
Displays the pixel height being used to display the incoming video signal on the  
Modero panel.  
• Maximum available screen height on a CV7 Modero panel is 480 pixels.  
Screen Refresh Rate:  
Displays the video refresh rate applied to the incoming video signal from the  
panel. Default rate is 60.  
Screen Rotation:  
Power Up Pages:  
Displays the degree of rotation applied to the on-screen image.  
Displays the first touch panel page assigned for display after the device is  
powered-up.  
• This information is taken from the TPD4 project file.  
• Most projects begin with a Main page.  
Start Up String:  
Wake Up String:  
Sleep String:  
File System:  
RAM:  
Displays the start-up string.  
Displays the wake up string used after an activation from a timeout.  
Displays the sleep string used during a panel’s sleep mode.  
Displays the amount of Compact Flash memory available on the Modero panel.  
Displays the available RAM (or Extended Memory module) on the Modero  
panel.  
Time & Date Setup Page  
The Time & Date Setup page (FIG. 80) allows you to alter/set the time and date information on  
the NetLinx Master. If either the Time/Date is modified on this page (then updated to the Master by  
pressing the Set Time button), all devices communicating to that target Master will then be updated  
to reflect the new information.  
Date Display  
fields  
Time Display  
fields  
Currently  
selected  
FIG. 80 Time and Date Setup page  
90  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
The only way to modify a panel’s time, without altering the Master, is to use NetLinx  
Code.  
The elements of the Time & Date Setup page are described in the table below:  
Time & Date Setup Page Elements  
Back:  
Returns you to the previously active touch panel page without saving changes  
(to save changes, use the Set Time button).  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Time Date Refresh/Set:  
This section provides you with two options:  
• The Get Time/Date button retrieves the Time and Date information from the  
Master.  
• The Set Time/Date button sets the Master to retain and save any  
time/date modifications made on the Time and Date Setup page.  
Time Display fields:  
• These fields display the time in three formats: STANDARD, STANDARD  
AM/PM, and 24 HOUR.  
Date Display fields:  
Set Date/Time:  
• These fields display the calendar date information in several different formats.  
This section provides a user with both UP/DN arrow buttons to alter the  
Master’s calendar date and time. The blue circle indicates which field is cur-  
rently selected.  
• Select the Year field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the year value  
(range = 2000 - 2037).  
• Select the Month field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the month value  
(range = 1 - 12).  
• Select the Day field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the day value  
(range = 1 - 31).  
• Select the Hour field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the hour value  
(24-hour military).  
• Select the Minute field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the minute value  
(range = 0 - 59).  
• Select the Second field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the second value  
(range = 0 - 59).  
CV7 touch panels do not have an on-board clock. This page both receives and sets  
the time/date of the NetLinx Master.  
91  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Volume Page  
The Volume page (FIG. 81) (accessed by pressing the Audio Adjustments button on the Setup page)  
allows you to adjust the master volume parameters and default panel sounds on the panel.  
FIG. 81 Volume configuration page  
The elements of the Volume page are described in the table below:  
Volume Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Master Volume:  
This section allows you to alter the current master volume level:  
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the volume level (range = 0 - 100).  
• The Master Volume bargraph indicates the current volume level.  
• The Mute button toggles the Mute feature.  
• The Play Test button plays a test WAV/MP3 file over the panel’s internal  
speakers.  
Mic Out Level:  
Allows you to adjust the current Microphone volume level (being received from  
the communicating breakout box).  
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the Microphone volume level  
(range = 0 - 100).  
• The Mic Out Level bargraph indicates the current Mic Out level.  
Internal Sound Level:  
This section allows you to adjust the current sound level on the internal panel  
speaker:  
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the volume output on the internal speakers  
(range = 0 - 100).  
• The Internal Sound Level bargraph indicates the current sound level.  
• The Mute button mutes the volume.  
Line In Level:  
Allows you to adjust the current Line-In volume level (being received from the  
communicating breakout box).  
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the Line-In volume level (range = 0 - 100).  
• The Line-In Level bargraph indicates the current Line-In level.  
• The Mute button mutes the Line-In volume.  
92  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Volume Page Elements (Cont.)  
Default Panel Sounds:  
Sets the Modero panel to play either the default Button Hit sound (when you  
touch an active button) and/or the default Button Miss sound (when you touch  
a non-active button or any area outside of the active button).  
Supported sampling rates for WAV  
The following is a listing of supported sampling rates associated for WAV files played on CV7  
panels. Some WAV files currently played on Modero's may not work on these panels. The  
supported sampling rates for WAV files are:  
Supported WAV Sampling Rates  
• 48000 Hz  
• 44100 Hz  
• 32000 Hz  
• 24000 Hz  
• 22050 Hz  
• 16000 Hz  
• 12000 Hz  
• 11025 Hz  
• 8000 Hz  
Protected Setup Page  
This button opens the Protected Setup page which centers around the properties used by the panel  
to properly communicate with the NetLinx Master. Refer to both the Protected Setup Navigation  
information.  
Video Adjustment Page  
The Video Setup page (FIG. 82) (accessed by pressing the Video Adjustment button on the Setup  
page) sets the Video properties of the incoming video signal from an NXA-AVB/ETHERNET  
Breakout Box.  
Incoming Video signal  
Once done making your screen  
adjustments, SAVE SETTINGS.  
FIG. 82 Video Setup page (showing default values)  
93  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
The elements of the Video Setup page are described in the table below:  
Video Setup Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Settings:  
• The Default Settings button sets the video settings to their default values  
(indicated in this table).  
• The Undo Changes button disregards any changes made on the page since  
the last settings were saved.  
• The Save Settings button saves any changes made to this page.  
Video Settings:  
• The Black & White button toggles the Black & White display mode.  
Default = Off.  
• The Sharpness button toggles the Interpolate (Sharpness) feature.  
Default = Off.  
• The Interlace button toggles the Interlacing feature.  
Default = On.  
Status:  
Format:  
Displays whether or not a video-sync signal is detected.  
Allows you to press this blue field and cycle through a choice of available video  
formats (NTSC, PAL, SECAM, or Auto detect).  
• Default = Auto.  
Brightness:  
Contrast:  
Saturation:  
Hue:  
Use the UP/DN buttons to alter the brightness level of the incoming signal.  
• Range = 0 - 255, default = 128.  
Use the UP/DN buttons to alter the contrast level of the incoming signal.  
• Range = 0 - 255, default = 128.  
Use the UP/DN buttons to alter the color saturation level of the incoming signal.  
• Range = 0 - 255, default = 128.  
Use the UP/DN buttons to alter the hue level of the incoming signal.  
• Range = 0 - 255, default = 128.  
94  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Battery Base Page  
This page (FIG. 83) allows you to alter/set the power warning preferences, monitor battery status  
information, and alter the display times for the battery warnings. The fields on this page are  
populated with information after the panel is connected to an optional NXA-BASE/1 Battery Base  
containing a single NXT-BP battery.  
FIG. 83 Battery Base page  
This page is ONLY available on CV7 Table Top panels (NXT) using an NXA-BASE/1. The  
elements of the Battery Base page are described in the table below:  
Battery Base Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Charge Status:  
Time Remaining (blue) indicates the amount of charge time (use) remaining  
on the battery within the connected NXA-BASE/1.  
Time Until Charged (green) indicates the amount of time remaining until the  
battery installed within the connected NXA-BASE/1 is fully charged.  
• Range = 0:00 - 12:59. This is read in HH:MM, hours and minutes.  
Panel Shutdown:  
Low Battery Warning:  
The Panel Shutdown UP/DN buttons alter the timeout value (in minutes).  
• This value determines the number of minutes that would need to pass before  
the panel automatically shuts-down.  
• Once shutdown, the unit would have to be restarted. A zero value disables  
this feature. Range = 0 - 240, default = 0 min.  
The Low Battery Warning UP/DN buttons alter the time value (in minutes)  
available on the battery (for use) before the panel displays a low battery  
warning.  
• Range - 10 - 45, default = 15 min.  
95  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Battery Base Page Elements (Cont.)  
Very Low Battery Warning: The Very Low Battery Warning UP/DN buttons alter the time value  
(in minutes) available on the battery (for use) before the panel displays a very  
low battery warning. This indicates a near-term panel shutdown.  
• Range = 3 - 15, default = 5 min.  
- This value can never exceed the Low Battery Warning value.  
When the NXT-BP battery (installed within the NXA-BASE/1 battery base)  
reaches a point where it needs to be recalibrated.  
- A recalibration pop-up screen appears to ask whether or not you choose  
to recalibrate the battery at this time.  
Battery Status fields:  
This section provides the ability to monitor the current battery charge level and  
charge quality:  
• The Battery One Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge  
available on the Slot 1 internal battery connection (bargraph range = 0 - 100).  
• The Battery One Quality bargraph indicates the physical capacity (quality) of  
the battery. Quality is the percentage of actual capacity vs. its rated capacity.  
For optimal performance, a battery should be replaced when the quality  
rating drops below 80%.  
• The Base Version field indicates the firmware version being used by the  
NXA-BASE/1 Battery Base connected to the NXT CV7 panel.  
• The Battery Level Port field indicates the port being used to report the  
charge status level back to the NetLinx Master on (set in TPD4).  
• The Battery Level field indicates the level being used to report the charge  
status level back to the NetLinx Master on (set in TPD4).  
Battery Power Brightness The DISABLE/DISABLED button acts as a power save feature with two  
Limit:  
available choices:  
Disable - activates the brightness limit set on the Modero panel and is used  
to conserve battery power. Activating this feature causes the panel to  
function at 80% of full brightness and overrides the Panel Brightness value  
set on the Setup page. This extends the battery usage time.  
Disabled - (illuminated when selected) deactivates this power save feature  
and makes the panel use the specified Panel Brightness level set on the  
Setup page.  
The term "quality" (in the context of a battery), refers to the current capacity relative to  
the batteries’ rated capacity. For example, after constant use, a battery may be  
operating at 75% of its rated capacity even though it might be fully charged. In this  
case, the battery could be incorrectly reporting its’ information back to the battery  
base and then consequently relating this information back to the Battery Base page.  
A battery can be recalibrated using an optional NXT-CHG (battery charger).  
96  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Protected Setup Navigation Buttons  
The Protected Setup Navigation Buttons (FIG. 84) appear on the left of the panel screen when the  
Protected Setup page is currently active.  
Modero Protected  
Setup Navigation  
Buttons  
FIG. 84 Protected Setup Navigation Buttons  
These Navigation Buttons are specific to these Modero panels and include panel specific elements  
described in the following table:  
Protected Setup Navigation Button Elements  
G4 Web Control:  
Press the G4 Web Control button to access the G4 Web Control page where  
you can enable or disable display and control of your panel (via the web) by a  
PC running a VNC client.  
• Refer to the G4 Web Control Page section on page 100 for more detailed  
information.  
Sensors:  
Press the Sensors button to access the Sensors Setup page where you can  
modify/monitor both the light and motion sensor settings.  
• Refer to the Sensor Setup section on page 101 for more detailed information.  
Passwords:  
Press the Passwords button to access the Passwords Setup page where you  
can specify up to five security passwords. Default password is 1988.  
• Refer to the Password Setup Page section on page 104 for more detailed  
information.  
Calibrate:  
Press the Calibrate button to access the Calibration page where you can use  
the displayed set of crosshairs to calibrate a touch panel.  
• Refer to the Calibration Page section on page 105 for more detailed  
information.  
Secondary Connection:  
Press the Secondary Connection button to access the Secondary Connection  
page where you can setup the wireless connection parameters used by the  
NXA-WC80211B/CF wireless interface card located within the Modero panel.  
detailed information.  
System Connection:  
Press the System Connection button to access the System Connection page  
where you can alter the communication parameters of both the NetLinx  
Master and Modero panel.  
• Refer to the System Connection Page section on page 109 for more detailed  
information.  
97  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Protected Setup Page  
The Protected Setup page (FIG. 85) centers around the properties used by the panel to properly  
communicate with the NetLinx Master. Enter the factory default password (1988) into the password  
keypad to access this page.  
Provides access to the panel  
firmware pages by enabling the  
grey front setup access button:  
- Setup page (after a 3 second  
press/hold)  
- Calibration page (after a 6 second  
press/hold)  
FIG. 85 Protected Setup page-showing default values  
The elements of the Protected Setup page are described in the table below:  
Protected Setup Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Device Number:  
Options:  
Opens a keypad that is used to set and display the current device number.  
Allows you to select various touch panel features:  
• The Function Show button enables the display of the channel port and  
channel code in the top left corner of the button, the level port and level code  
in the bottom left corner, and the address port and address code in the  
bottom right corner (see FIG. 87 for an example of the function locations).  
• Use the Page Tracking button to toggle page tracking. When enabled, the  
touch panel sends page data back to the NetLinx Master, or vice versa  
depending on the touch panel settings.  
• Use the Telnet button to enable or disable the telnet server on the panel. This  
feature focuses on direct telnet communication to the panel.  
• Use the Front Button Setup Access button to activate the grey Front Setup  
Access button (located below the LCD) to access the firmware pages.  
- Default condition is On.  
- Press and hold this grey button for 3 seconds to access the Setup page.  
- Press and hold this grey button for 6 seconds to access the Calibration  
page.  
Reboot Panel:  
Pressing this button causes the panel to restart after saving any changes.  
98  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Protected Setup Page Elements (Cont.)  
System Recovery:  
Allows you to either reset the touch panel to factory default settings and/or wipe  
out all existing touch panel pages:  
• The Reset System Settings button allows a user to wipe out all current  
configuration parameters on the touch panel (such as IP Addresses, Device  
Number assignments, Passwords, and other presets).  
- Pressing this button launches a Confirmation dialog (FIG. 86) which asks  
you to confirm your selection.  
- This dialog is configured with a delay timer that does not enable the YES  
button for 5 seconds. This delay provides an additional amount of time for  
the user to confirm their decision.  
• The Remove User Pages button allows you remove all current TPD4 touch  
panel pages currently on the panel (including the pre-installed AMX Demo  
pages).  
- Pressing this button launches a Confirmation dialog (FIG. 86) which asks  
you to confirm your selection.  
- This dialog is configured with a delay timer that does not enable the YES  
button for 5 seconds. This delay provides an additional amount of time for  
the user to confirm their decision.  
You have a wait time of 5 seconds  
before the YES option is enabled.  
FIG. 86 Protected Setup page-System Recovery confirmation dialog  
Channel Code  
Number  
Channel Port  
Channel Code  
Number  
Channel Port  
Level Port  
7,10  
Slider  
Address  
Port  
3,132  
2,8  
Address  
Port  
Button  
Level Port  
4,9  
1,8  
3,50  
Channel Code  
Number  
Channel Code  
Number  
Address Code  
Number  
Address Code  
Number  
FIG. 87 Button/slider Function Show example  
99  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
G4 Web Control Page  
The G4 Web Control page (FIG. 88) centers around enabling and disabling both the display and  
control of your panel (via the web). An external PC running a VNC client (installed during the  
initial communication to the G4 panel) makes this possible.  
FIG. 88 G4 Web Control page  
Each panel supports the open standard Virtual Network Computing (VNC) interface. These panels  
contain a VNC server that allows them to accept a connection from any other device running a  
VNC client. Once a connection is established to that target device, the client can control the touch  
panel remotely. The elements of the G4 Web Control page are described in the table below:  
G4 Web Control Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
G4 Web Control Settings:  
Sets the IP communication values for the touch panel and contains:  
Enable/Enabled  
• The Enable/Enabled button allows you to toggle between the two G4  
activation settings:  
- Enable - deactivates the G4 Web Control feature on the panel.  
- Enabled - activates the G4 Web Control feature on the panel and allows  
an external PC running a VNC client to access the panel (after the  
remaining fields are configured).  
Network Interface Select  
Displays the detected method of communication to the web:  
Wired is used when a direct Ethernet connection is being used for  
communication to the web. This is a default setting if no wireless interface  
card is detected by the panel.  
Wireless is used when a wireless card is detected within the internal card  
slot. This method provides an indirect communication to the web via a  
pre-configured Wireless Access Point.  
Web Control Name  
Allows you to enter a unique alpha-numeric string that is used as the display  
name of the panel within the Manage WebControls window of the new NetLinx  
Security browser window.  
• This Web Control tab displays a G4 icon alongside the link to the Web Control  
Name given to this panel (FIG. 89).  
Web Control Password  
Allows you to enter the G4 Authentication session password associated for  
VNC web access of this panel.  
100  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
G4 Web Control Page Elements (Cont.)  
G4 Web Control Settings  
(Cont.):  
Web Control Port  
Allows you to enter the port value that the VNC Web Server runs on.  
• Default value is 5900.  
Maximum Number of  
Connections  
This read-only field displays the maximum number of users that can be  
simultaneously connected to the target panel via the web.  
• Default value is 1.  
Current Connection Count This read-only field displays the current number of users connected to the  
target panel via the web. This value cannot exceed the Maximum number field.  
G4 Web Control Timeout:  
Sets the length of time (in minutes) the panel can remain idle (no cursor  
movements) before the session is closed and the user is disconnected.  
• Minimum value = 0 minutes (panel never times-out)  
• Maximum value = 240 minutes (panel times-out after 240 minutes/4hours)  
FIG. 89 Sample relationship between G4 Web Control and NetLinx Security-Mange WebControls window  
detailed instructions on how to use the G4 Web Control page with the new web-based NetLinx  
Security application.  
Sensor Setup  
The Sensor Setup page (FIG. 90) allows you to adjust the Light and Motion Sensor parameters on a  
Modero touch panel.  
FIG. 90 Sensor Setup page  
101  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
       
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
A light level value between the Minimum and Maximum DIM Mode values delivers an  
average light level. The DIM mode Min Level can never exceed the DIM Mode Max  
Level.  
The elements of the Sensor Setup page are described in the table below:  
Sensor Setup Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Light Sensor:  
Allows you to monitor and alter the sensitivity of the Modero panel light sensor:  
• The Light Sensor Level field indicates the level used to report the light  
sensor level back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
• The Light Sensor Level Port field indicates the port used to report the light  
sensor level back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
• The Light Sensor Channel field indicates the level used to report the sensor  
channel back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4). It is On when you are  
below the Maximum dim mode level (read-only).  
• The Light Sensor Channel Port field indicates the port used to report the  
sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
• The Light Level field provides a numeric value representing the current value  
of the light level detected by the on-board photo-sensor.  
• The Light Level bargraph displays a horizontal bargraph indicating the current  
value of the light level detected by the on-board photo-sensor. This bargraph  
provides a visual representation of the numeric value displayed within the  
Light Level field.  
• Use the Dim Mode Max Level bargraph to alter the Maximum DIM level value  
used to activate the DIM Mode Brightness Level (range = 0 - 100).  
• Use the Dim Mode Min Level bargraph to alter the Minimum DIM level value  
used to activate the DIM Mode Brightness Level (range = 0 - 100).  
- The position of this bargraph can never exceed that of the Dim Mode  
Max Level.  
Dim Mode Minimum  
Brightness:  
Allows you to alter the sensitivity of the Modero panel light sensor:  
Toggle the Enable/Enabled button to either active/inactive the DIM Mode  
feature:  
- Enable - activates this feature. Once active (by receiving a value below the  
Dim Mode Min Level value), the current light level ramps to the DIM Mode  
value within a few seconds.  
- Enabled - (illuminated when selected) deactivates this feature.  
• Use the DIM Mode Brightness UP/DN buttons to alter the DIM level.  
- Range = 0 - 100.  
- The lower the value, the darker a room must be before the LCD Brightness  
value changes to conform to a DIM room (and vice versa with a  
higher value).  
• The DIM Mode Minimum Brightness bargraph indicates the current DIM  
Mode Brightness level.  
- This level corresponds to the brightness level of the LCD used when  
the DIM Mode is active.  
- The Brightness value of the panel in a DIM room (low-light) is much  
less than that of a Non-DIM (well to brightly-lit) where the LCD Brightness  
must be higher to display the screen content clearly.  
102  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Sensor Setup Page Elements (Cont.)  
Motion Sensor:  
Provides the following fields:  
• The Motion Detection field displays a reactive button that changes color  
(illuminates) and displays the words "Motion Detected" when motion is  
detected by the Modero panel’s front motion sensor.  
• The Motion Sensor Port field indicates the port used to report the motion  
sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
• The Motion Sensor Channel field indicates the channel used to report the  
motion sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
Wake Panel On Motion  
Sense:  
The Wake Panel Sensitivity relates to the sensitivity of the motion sensor to  
detect motion and wake the panel accordingly.  
Toggle the Enable/Enabled button to either active/inactive this feature:  
- Enable - activates this feature. Activating this feature reactivates the  
panel from a panel timeout (sleep) mode.  
- Enabled - (illuminated when selected) deactivates this feature and  
makes the panel use the specified Display Timeout value set on the  
Setup Page.  
• Use the Wake Panel UP/DN buttons to alter the sensitivity value.  
- Range = 0 - 100.  
• The horizontal WAKE PANEL SENSITIVITY bargraph indicates the current  
motion sensitivity value associated with waking the panel from a timeout.  
There is a relationship between the motion sensor and the panel sleep feature. If a  
panel is set to Sleep Mode, there is a time delay before the motion sensor is activated  
to detect motion. By creating a time delay to the detection, this allows a user to set  
the sleep mode and leave the panels’ detection range. In this way, the panel doesn’t  
awake immediately after the sleep is active and you move away.  
Making the most of the Automated Brightness Control feature (DIM Mode)  
Please follow the steps below to set up Automated Brightness Control:  
1. Set the lighting conditions in the room to maximum (turn On all the lights).  
2. Set the Maximum Panel Brightness, from the Setup page, to a comfortable level.  
Sitting in front of the panel, you should be able to comfortably see someone sitting  
behind the panel without being “blinded” by the panel.  
3. Open the Sensors Setup page (FIG. 90) from the Protected Setup menu section.  
4. Move around the panel and block the direct or indirect light from the room fixtures with your  
body. Take note of the drop in the lighting level being detected by the panel in response to your  
movements.  
5. Set the Maximum brightness of the Dimmer (Dim Mode Max Level) below the detected drop.  
This will make sure that the panel does not react to variations in the lighting conditions of a  
normal working environment.  
The maximum (upper level) of the dimmer should be at least 15% lower than the  
maximum detected level.  
6. Set the minimum lighting conditions in the room (not complete darkness but the minimal  
lighting setup, unless complete darkness is an “operational option” for the room).  
103  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
7. Set the Minimum Dimmer Brightness (Dim Mode Min Level) to a comfortable level by sitting  
in front of the panel. You should be able to comfortably see someone sitting behind the panel  
without being “blinded” by the panel.  
8. Move around the panel and block the direct or indirect light from the room fixtures with your  
body. Take note of the drop in the lighting level being detected by the panel in response to your  
movements.  
9. Set the Minimum brightness of the Dimmer (Dim Mode Max Level) below the detected drop.  
This will make sure that the panel does not react to variations in the lighting conditions of a  
normal working environment.  
The minimum (lower level) of the dimmer should be at least 10% lower than the  
minimum detected level (ex: lower dimmer level at 30% if the detected lighting of the  
room is at 40%).  
Password Setup Page  
The Password Setup page (FIG. 91) centers around the properties used to assign passwords for the  
Modero panel pages.  
FIG. 91 Password Setup page  
The elements of the Password Setup page are described in the table below:  
Password Setup Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
In Panel Password  
Change:  
Accesses the alphanumeric values associated to particular password sets.  
PASSWORD 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (protected) buttons open a keyboard where you can  
enter alphanumeric values associated to a selected password group.  
• Clearing Password #5 removes the need to enter a password before  
accessing the Protected Setup page.  
104  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Calibration Page  
This page (FIG. 92) allows you to calibrate the touch panel using the pre-selected touch driver.  
Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (below the Modero LCD) for  
6 seconds to access the Calibration page.  
Press the crosshairs to calibrate the panel and return to the last active firmware  
page.  
The request to touch the crosshairs  
is the first on-screen message  
Calibration successful is the second  
on-screen message that appears  
after the calibration process is  
completed  
On-screen crosshairs used for  
calibration of the touch device  
FIG. 92 Calibration page (actually 3 separate screens)  
If the calibration was improperly set and you cannot return to the Calibration  
page (through the panel’s firmware); you can access this firmware page via  
G4 WebControl where you can navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the  
Calibrate button through your VNC window.  
This action causes the panel to go to the Calibration page seen above, where you  
can physically recalibrate the actual touch panel again using the above procedures.  
Secondary Connection Page  
The Secondary Connection page (FIG. 93) sets the communication information for the installed  
wireless interface card. This information includes its corresponding IP communication parameters,  
wireless communication settings, and read the device number assigned to the Modero panel. Both  
CV7 panels can use the NXA-WC80211B/CF wireless card for wireless communication. This card  
also supports Wired Encryption Protocol (WEP) encryption of 64-bit and 128-bit key lengths. Refer  
Configuring a Wireless Network Access section on page 57 for more detailed information of setting  
up the Modero panel for wireless network access.  
105  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
IP Settings section  
Wireless Settings section  
Red fields are user-editable  
Blue fields cycle through choices  
Grey fields are read-only  
Changes on this page  
take effect after using  
the BACK button to  
return to the previous  
page  
FIG. 93 Secondary Connection page (showing default values)  
The elements of the Secondary Connection page are described in the table below:  
Secondary Connection Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
IP Settings:  
Sets the IP communication values for the touch panel and contains:  
Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes.  
DHCP/STATIC  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) assigns IP Addresses to client  
stations logging onto a TCP/IP network from a DHCP server.  
Static IP is a permanent IP Address that is assigned to a node in a TCP/IP  
network.  
Note: If DHCP is selected, the following fields become read-only: IP Address,  
Subnet Mask, Gateway, Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, and Domain.  
IP Address  
Sets the secondary IP Address assigned to the panel.  
Sets a subnetwork address to the panel.  
Subnet Mask  
Subnetwork mask is the technique used by the IP protocol to filter messages  
into a particular network segment (subnet).  
Gateway  
Sets a gateway value to the panel.  
Gateway is a computer that either performs protocol conversion between  
different types of networks/applications or acts as a go-between for two or  
more networks that use the same protocols.  
Host Name  
Sets the host name of the panel.  
• PRIMARY DNS sets the address of the primary DNS server being used by the  
Modero panel for host name lookups.  
- DNS (Domain Name System) is software that lets users locate computers  
on a local network or the Internet (TCP/IP network) by host and domain. The  
DNS server maintains a database of host names for its’ domain and their  
corresponding IP Addresses.  
• SECONDARY DNS sets the secondary DNS value to the panel.  
Primary DNS  
Sets the address of the primary DNS server used by the panel for host name  
lookups.  
Secondary DNS  
Domain  
Sets the secondary DNS value to the Modero panel.  
Sets the unique name on the Internet to the panel for DNS look-up.  
This value is factory set by the manufacturer of the wireless Ethernet card.  
MAC Address  
106  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Secondary Connection Page Elements (Cont.)  
Access Point MAC  
Address:  
This value is factory set by the manufacturer of the Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
When communicating with a WAP200G enter the MAC Address (BSSID) of the  
target WAP as the Access Point MAC Address. Refer to the WAP200G  
Instruction Manual for more detailed information on the interaction between  
these two product lines.  
Wireless Settings:  
Sets the communication values for the NXA-WC80211B/CF wireless interface  
card installed within the Modero panel.  
Network Name (SSID)  
Provides the Service Set Identifier (SSID), required by the panel, before it is  
permitted to join the wireless network. The SSID is the unique name used on  
the WAP and assigned to all panels in a wireless network that are communicat-  
ing to the same target WAP.  
• It is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters, which may be any  
keyboard character. Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your  
wireless network.  
• This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on  
the same network.  
Authentication  
Encryption  
CV7 panels only allow one mode: Open System.  
• An Open system network allows connections from any client without  
authenticating whether that client has permission to associate with the  
network.  
Cycles through the available encryption options: Clear Text, WEP64, and  
WEP128. Wired Equivalent Privacy is an 802.11 security protocol for wireless  
networks. The WEP encryption method is designed to provide the "equivalent"  
security available in wireline networks.  
Clear Text causes network packets to be sent out as unencrypted text.  
WEP64 enables WEP encryption at 64-bits. In this case all packets will be  
transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key.  
WEP128 enables WEP encryption at 128-bits. All packets are transmitted with  
their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key.  
If the key is not the correct size, the system will resize it to match the  
number of bits required for the WEP encryption mode selected.  
107  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Secondary Connection Page Elements (Cont.)  
Wireless Settings (Cont.):  
Generate (Passphrase)  
Pressing the Generate button displays an on-screen keyboard which allows  
you to enter a passphrase and then AUTOMATICALLY generate all four WEP  
keys which are compatible only among Modero panels.  
Note: The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key  
generation formula. Therefore, this same Passphrase generates identical  
keys when done on any Modero because they all use the same  
Modero-specific generator. The Passphrase generator is case sensitive.  
Take these WEP keys and enter them into the target WAP. When also working  
with multiple panels, these WEP Keys (identical across all Modero panels)  
must be entered manually into the target WAP.  
• Once all panels have been setup in this way, these WEP keys can then be  
entered into the associated Wireless Access Point for ease of installation.  
The Passphrase generator is unique to Modero panels. The Key generator on  
these Modero panels are specific and do not generate the same keys as  
other external non-AMX wireless devices.  
- Example: If you enter the word apple into the Passphrase generator on a  
3rd-party Wireless Access Point, it comes back with 1a:2b:3c:4d:etc.  
Entering the same apple in the Passphrase generator of any Modero panel  
generates a different key: a1:b2:c3:d4:etc. Only AMX Modero panels  
generate the same Current Key by using a unique Passphrase key  
generation technology. A Current Key string, when generated anywhere  
else, will not match those created on the Modero panels.  
Note: The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation  
formula. The passphrase generator is case sensitive.  
Default Key  
Cycles through the four available WEP key identifiers in order to select a WEP  
key to use. As the Default Key value is altered (through selection) the  
corresponding Current Key is displayed. Each of these corresponds to a WEP  
key.  
• This feature is useful for accessing different networks without having to  
re-enter that networks’ WEP key.  
• It is also sometimes used to set up a rotating key schedule to provide an extra  
layer of security.  
WEP Keys  
This feature provides you with another level of security by selecting a Key value.  
• A single button is available for each WEP key up to a maximum of four keys.  
• Pushing any of these buttons brings up an on-screen keyboard. Keys should  
be entered in hexadecimal notation. It is common practice for every two  
characters (representing a single byte) to be separated by a colon.  
• Press Done to accept any changes and save the new value.  
Ex: 01:0A:67:F3:56, although this is not necessary and the key may be  
entered by omitting the colons. A 64-bit key will be 10 characters in length  
while a 128-bit key will be 26 characters in length. The length of the key  
entered determines the level of WEP encryption employed.  
Either 64-bit or 128-bit.  
• 128-bit keys may also be entered and are used if supported by the  
internal wireless card.  
Current Key  
Displays the current WEP key in use. Keys may also be examined by touching  
the key buttons and noting the keyboard initialization text.  
• When working with a single panel and a single WAP, it is recommended that  
you manually enter the Current Key from the WAP into the selected WEP Key.  
• When working with a single WAP and multiple panels, it is recommended that  
you generate a Current Key using the same passphrase on all panels and  
then enter the panel-produced WEP key manually into the Wireless Access  
Point.  
108  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Secondary Connection Page Elements (Cont.)  
Wireless Settings (Cont.):  
Channel  
The RF channel being used for connection to the WAP (read -only).  
• This is determined through the WAP.  
Link Quality  
Displays the current quality of the link (as descriptive colored text) from the  
wireless NIC to the Wireless Access Point in real time.  
• The bargraph has been replaced with a descriptions: None, Poor, Fair,  
Good, Very Good, and Excellent. Green color text indicates better  
communication quality.  
• It reports the quality of the signal over the air (direct sequence spread  
spectrum). Even when the link quality is at its lowest you still have a  
connection and with it the ability to transmit and receive data, even if at much  
lower speeds.  
Note: Both Link Quality and Signal Strength are applicable to the RF  
connection only. It is quite possible to have an RF signal to a Wireless Access  
Point but be unable to communicate with it because of either incorrect IP or  
encryption settings.  
Signal Strength  
SNR (Signal Noise Ratio) is a measure of the relative strength of a wireless RF  
connection. This indicator displays a description of the signal strength from the  
Wireless Access Point connection.  
• The bargraph has been replaced with a descriptions: None, Poor, Fair,  
Good, Very Good, and Excellent. Green color text indicates better signal  
strength.  
• Given this value and the link quality above, a user can determine the noise  
level component of SNR.  
Ex: If the signal strength is high but the link quality is low then the cause of the  
link degradation is noise. However, if the signal strength is low and the link  
quality is low the cause would simply be signal strength.  
Data Rate  
The data rate (in Mbps) at which the panel is currently communicating with a  
target WAP at (dynamic).  
• As you move closer to the target WAP (and both the signal strength/  
quality), the data rate increases and as the quality degrades this rate  
decreases.  
• Data rates for 802.11b communication are: 1, 2, 5.5, and 11 Mbps.  
• Ex: 802.11b has a max data rate is 11 Mbps.  
System Connection Page  
The System Connection page (FIG. 94) sets the Secondary DNS Address information with its  
corresponding IP communication parameters, NetLinx Master communication settings, and reads  
the device number assigned to the Modero panel.  
IP Settings section  
Master Connection section  
(NetLinx Master properties)  
Master Connection features are not  
saved until the panel is rebooted  
Red fields are user-editable  
Blue fields cycle through choices  
Grey fields are read-only  
FIG. 94 System Connection page showing default values (reads and assigns values to the panel and Master)  
109  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
The elements of the System Connection page are described in the table below:  
System Connection Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
IP Settings:  
Sets the IP communication values for the panel and contains:  
Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes.  
DHCP/Static  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) assigns IP Addresses from  
client stations logging onto a TCP/IP network via a DHCP server.  
Static IP is a permanent IP Address that is assigned to a node in a TCP/IP  
network.  
IP Address  
Sets the secondary IP Address assigned to the panel.  
Sets a subnetwork address to the panel.  
Subnet Mask  
Subnetwork mask is the technique used by the IP protocol to filter messages  
into a particular network segment (Subnet).  
Gateway  
Sets a gateway value to the panel.  
Gateway is a computer that either performs protocol conversion between  
different types of networks/applications or acts as a go-between two or more  
networks that use the same protocols.  
Host Name  
Sets the host name of the panel.  
Primary DNS  
Sets the address of the primary DNS server used for host name lookups.  
DNS (Domain Name System) is software that lets users locate computers on  
a local network or the Internet (TCP/IP network) by host and domain. The  
DNS server maintains a database of host names for its’ domain and their  
corresponding IP Addresses.  
Secondary DNS  
Domain  
Sets a secondary DNS value to the panel.  
Sets the unique name on the Internet to the panel for DNS look-up.  
• The panel belongs to the DNS domain.  
Ethernet Mode  
MAC Address  
Sets the speed of the Ethernet connection to the panel.  
• Choices are: Auto, 10 Half Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or  
100 Full Duplex.  
Displays a read-only field that is factory set by AMX for the built-in Ethernet  
interface.  
110  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
System Connection Page Elements (Cont.)  
Master Connection:  
Sets the NetLinx Master communication values:  
Type  
Sets the NetLinx Master to communicate with the panel via either USB or  
Ethernet. This is based on the cable connection from the rear.  
ICSNet is not a supported option on this panel.  
Ethernet is a CAT-5 cable (10/100Base T terminated in an RJ-45 connector)  
used to network computers together and is used in most LAN (local area  
networks). This description is also used to refer to both wired and wireless  
communication.  
USB option cannot be used on Modero panels which are not equipped with a  
rear USB port.  
Mode  
Cycles between the different connection modes (URL, Listen, and Auto)  
(ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)  
URL - In this mode, enter the IP/URL, Master Port Number, and  
username/password (if used) on the Master.  
- The System Number field is read-only because the panel obtains this  
information from the communicating Master.  
Listen - In this mode, add the Modero panel address into the URL List in  
NetLinx Studio and set the connection mode to Listen. This mode allows the  
Modero touch panel to "listen" for the Master’s communication signals.  
- The System Number and Master IP/URL fields are red-only.  
Auto - In this mode, enter the System Number and a username/password  
(if applicable). This mode is used when both the panel and the NetLinx  
Master are on the same Subnet and the Master has its UDP feature enabled.  
- Master IP/URL field is read-only.  
System Number  
Master IP/URL  
Allows you to enter a system number. Default value is 0 (zero).  
(ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)  
Sets the Master IP or URL of the NetLinx Master.  
(ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)  
Master Port Number  
Allows you to enter the port number used with the NetLinx Master.  
• Default value is 1319. (ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)  
Username/Password  
If the target Master has been previously secured, enter the alpha-numeric string  
(into each field) assigned to a pre-configured user profile on the Master.  
This profile should have the pre-defined level of access/configuration rights.  
111  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
112  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Programming  
You can program the touch panel, using the commands in this section, to perform a wide variety of  
operations using Send_Commands and variable text commands.  
A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the  
Device: Port: System (in all programming examples - Panel is used in place of these values and  
represents all Modero panels).  
Verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master firmware. Verify the NetLinx Studio  
program being used is version 2.3 or higher and TPD4 is version 2.5 or higher.  
Button Assignments  
• Button Channel Range: 1 - 4000 Button push and Feedback (per address port)  
• Button Variable Text range: 1 - 4000 (per address port)  
• Button States Range: 1 - 256  
(0 = All states, for General buttons 1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
• Level Range: 1 - 600 (Default level value 0 - 255, can be set up to 1 - 65535)  
• Address port Range: 1 - 100  
These button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels  
themselves.  
Page Commands  
These Page Commands are used in NetLinx Programming Language and are case insensitive.  
Page Commands  
@APG  
Add the popup page to a group if it does not already exist. If the new popup is added to a  
group which has a popup displayed on the current page along with the new pop-up, the  
displayed popup will be hidden and the new popup will be displayed.  
Add a specific  
popup page to a  
specified popup  
group.  
Syntax:  
"'@APG-<popup page name>;<popup group name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@APG-Popup1;Group1'"  
Adds the popup page ’Popup1’ to the popup group ’Group1’.  
Syntax:  
@CPG  
Clear all popup  
pages from  
specified popup  
group.  
"'@CPG-<popup group name>'"  
Variable:  
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@CPG-Group1'"  
Clears all popup pages from the popup group ’Group1’.  
113  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
@DPG  
Syntax:  
Delete a specific  
popup page from  
specified popup  
group if it exists.  
"'@DPG-<popup page name>;<popup group name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@DPG-Popup1;Group1'"  
Deletes the popup page ’Popup1’ from the popup group ’Group1’.  
@PDR  
If the flag is set, the popup will return to its default location on show instead of its last drag  
location.  
Set the popup  
location reset flag. Syntax:  
"'@PDR-<popup page name>;<reset flag>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
reset flag = 1 = Enable reset flag  
0 = Disable reset flag  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PDR-Popup1;1'"  
Popup1 will return to its default location when turned On.  
@PHE  
Syntax:  
Set the hide effect  
for the specified  
popup page to the  
named hide effect.  
"'@PHE-<popup page name>;<hide effect name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
hide effect name = Refers to the popup effect names being used.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHE-Popup1;Slide to Left'"  
Sets the Popup1 hide effect name to ’Slide to Left’.  
@PHP  
Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect; however, the command will specify both.  
This command sets the location at which the effect will end at.  
Set the hide effect  
position.  
Syntax:  
"'@PHP-<popup page name>;<x coordinate>,<y coordinate>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHP-Popup1;75,0'"  
Sets the Popup1 hide effect x-coordinate value to 75 and the y-coordinate value to 0.  
@PHT  
Syntax:  
Set the hide effect  
time for the  
specified popup  
page.  
"'@PHT-<popup page name>;<hide effect time>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
hide effect time = Given in 1/10ths of a second.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHT-Popup1;50'"  
Sets the Popup1 hide effect time to 5 seconds.  
114  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
@PPA  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used. Same as the ’Clear Page’ command  
in TPDesign4.  
Close all popups  
on a specified  
page.  
Syntax:  
"'@PPA-<page name>'"  
Variable:  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPA-Page1'"  
Close all popups on Page1.  
@PPF  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is  
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as  
the ’Hide Popup’ command in TPDesign4.  
Deactivate a  
specific popup  
page on either a  
specified page or  
the current page.  
Syntax:  
"'@PPF-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPF-Popup1;Main'"  
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPF-Popup1'"  
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.  
@PPG  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). Toggling refers to the  
activating/deactivating (On/Off) of a popup page. This command works in the same way  
as the ’Toggle Popup’ command in TPDesign4.  
Toggle a  
specific popup  
page on either a  
specified page or  
the current page.  
Syntax:  
"'@PPG-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPG-Popup1;Main'"  
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the ’Main’ page from one state to another (On/Off).  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPG-Popup1'"  
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page from one state to another (On/Off).  
@PPK  
Kill refers to the deactivating (Off) of a popup window from all pages. If the pop-up page is  
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as  
the 'Clear Group' command in TPDesign 4.  
Kill a specific  
popup page from  
all pages.  
Syntax:  
"'@PPK-<popup page name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPK-Popup1'"  
Kills the popup page ’Popup1’ on all pages.  
115  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
@PPM  
A Modal popup page, when active, only allows you to use the buttons and features on that  
popup page. All other buttons on the panel page are inactivated.  
Set the modality  
of a specific  
popup page to  
Modal or  
Syntax:  
"'@PPM-<popup page name>;<mode>'"  
Variable:  
NonModal.  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
mode = NONMODAL converts a previously Modal popup page to a NonModal.  
MODAL converts a previously NonModal popup page to Modal.  
modal = 1 and non-modal = 0  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPM-Popup1;Modal'"  
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to Modal.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPM-Popup1;1'"  
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to Modal.  
@PPN  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is  
already on, do not re-draw it. This command works in the same way as the ’Show Popup’  
command in TPDesign4.  
Activate a  
specific popup  
page to launch on Syntax:  
either a specified  
"'@PPN-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
page or the  
current page.  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPN-Popup1;Main'"  
Activates ’Popup1’ on the ’Main’ page.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPN-Popup1'"  
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.  
If timeout is empty, popup page will clear the timeout.  
Syntax:  
@PPT  
Set a specific  
popup page to  
timeout within a  
specified time.  
"'@PPT-<popup page name>;<timeout>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
timeout = Timeout duration in 1/10ths of a second.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPT-Popup1;30'"  
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to timeout within 3 seconds.  
This command works in the same way as the 'Clear All' command in TPDesign 4.  
Syntax:  
@PPX  
Close all  
popups on all  
pages.  
"'@PPX'"  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPX'"  
Close all popups on all pages.  
116  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
@PSE  
Syntax:  
Set the show  
effect for the  
specified popup  
page to the  
named show  
effect.  
"'@PSE-<popup page name>;<show effect name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
show effect name = Refers to the popup effect name being used.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PSE-Popup1;Slide from Left'"  
Sets the Popup1 show effect name to ’Slide from Left’.  
@PSP  
Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect; however, the command will specify both.  
This command sets the location at which the effect will begin at.  
Set the show  
effect position.  
Syntax:  
"'@PSP-<popup page name>;<x coordinate>,<y coordinate>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PSP-Popup1;100,0'"  
Sets the Popup1 show effect x-coordinate value to 100 and the y-coordinate value to 0.  
@PST  
Syntax:  
Set the show  
effect time for the  
specified popup  
page.  
"'@PST-<popup page name>;<show effect time>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
show effect time = Given in 1/10ths of a second.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PST-Popup1;50'"  
Sets the Popup1 show effect time to 5 seconds.  
PAGE  
Flips to a page with a specified page name. If the page is currently active, it will not redraw  
the page.  
Flip to a specified  
page.  
Syntax:  
"'PAGE-<page name>'"  
Variable:  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PAGE-Page1'"  
Flips to page1.  
117  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
PPOF  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is  
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as  
the ’Hide Popup’ command in TPDesign4.  
Deactivate a  
specific popup  
page on either a  
specified page or  
the current page.  
Syntax:  
"'PPOF-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOF-Popup1;Main'"  
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOF-Popup1'"  
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.  
PPOG  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). Toggling refers to the  
activating/deactivating (On/Off) of a popup page. This command works in the same way  
as the ’Toggle Popup’ command in TPDesign4.  
Toggle a  
specific popup  
page on either a  
specified page or  
the current page.  
Syntax:  
"'PPOG-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOG-Popup1;Main'"  
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page from one state to another (On/Off).  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOG-Popup1'"  
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page from one state to another (On/Off).  
PPON  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is  
already On, do not re-draw it. This command works in the same way as the ’Show Popup’  
command in TPDesign4.  
Activate a  
specific popup  
page to launch on Syntax:  
either a specified  
"'PPON-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
page or the  
current page.  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPON-Popup1; Main'"  
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPON-Popup1'"  
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.  
118  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Programming Numbers  
The following information provides the programming numbers for colors, fonts, and borders.  
Colors can be used to set the colors on buttons, sliders, and pages. The lowest color number  
represents the lightest color-specific display; the highest number represents the darkest display. For  
example, 0 represents light red, and 5 is dark red.  
RGB triplets and names for basic 88 colors  
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors  
Index No.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
Name  
Red  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
128  
112  
96  
80  
64  
48  
0
Green  
0
Blue  
0
Very Light Red  
Light Red  
0
0
Red  
0
0
Medium Red  
Dark Red  
0
0
0
0
Very Dark Red  
Very Light Orange  
Light Orange  
Orange  
0
0
128  
112  
96  
0
0
0
Medium Orange  
Dark Orange  
Very Dark Orange  
Very Light Yellow  
Light Yellow  
Yellow  
80  
0
64  
0
48  
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
0
Medium Yellow  
Dark Yellow  
Very Dark Yellow  
Very Light Lime  
Light Lime  
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Lime  
0
Medium Lime  
Dark Lime  
0
0
Very Dark Lime  
Very Light Green  
Light Green  
Green  
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
0
0
0
Medium Green  
Dark Green  
Very Dark Green  
Very Light Mint  
Light Mint  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
128  
112  
96  
80  
64  
48  
0
Mint  
0
Medium Mint  
Dark Mint  
0
0
Very Dark Mint  
0
119  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Programming  
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors (Cont.)  
Index No.  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
Name  
Red  
0
Green  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
128  
112  
96  
80  
64  
48  
0
Blue  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
Very Light Cyan  
Light Cyan  
Cyan  
0
0
Medium Cyan  
Dark Cyan  
Very Dark Cyan  
Very Light Aqua  
Light Aqua  
Aqua  
0
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Medium Aqua  
Dark Aqua  
Very Dark Aqua  
Very Light Blue  
Light Blue  
0
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Blue  
0
0
Medium Blue  
Dark Blue  
0
0
0
0
Very Dark Blue  
Very Light Purple  
Light Purple  
Purple  
0
0
128  
112  
96  
80  
64  
48  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
255  
238  
204  
170  
136  
102  
187  
153  
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Medium Purple  
Dark Purple  
Very Dark Purple  
Very Light Magenta  
Light Magenta  
Magenta  
0
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Medium Magenta  
Dark Magenta  
Very Dark Magenta  
Very Light Pink  
Light Pink  
0
0
0
0
128  
112  
96  
0
Pink  
0
Medium Pink  
Dark Pink  
0
80  
0
64  
Very Dark Pink  
White  
0
48  
255  
238  
204  
170  
136  
102  
187  
153  
255  
238  
204  
170  
136  
102  
187  
153  
Grey1  
Grey3  
Grey5  
Grey7  
Grey9  
Grey4  
Grey6  
120  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors (Cont.)  
Index No.  
Name  
Red  
119  
85  
Green  
119  
85  
Blue  
119  
85  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
255  
Grey8  
Grey10  
Grey12  
Grey13  
Grey2  
51  
51  
51  
34  
34  
34  
221  
68  
221  
68  
221  
68  
Grey11  
Grey14  
Black  
17  
17  
17  
0
0
0
TRANSPARENT  
99  
53  
99  
Font styles and ID numbers  
Font styles can be used to program the text fonts on buttons, sliders, and pages. The following chart  
shows the default font type and their respective ID numbers generated by TPDesign4.  
Default Font Styles and ID Numbers  
Font ID # Font type  
Size  
9
Font ID # Font type  
Size  
9
1
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
AMX Bold  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Arial  
2
12  
18  
26  
32  
18  
26  
34  
14  
20  
36  
Arial  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
24  
36  
10  
8
3
Arial  
4
Arial  
5
Arial  
6
Arial  
7
Arial  
8
Arial  
9
Arial  
10  
11  
AMX Bold  
Arial Bold  
Arial Bold  
AMX Bold  
32 - Variable Fonts start at 32.  
You must import fonts into a TPDesign4 project file. The font ID numbers are  
assigned by TPDesign4. These values are also listed in the  
Generate Programmer’s Report.  
121  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Border styles and Programming numbers  
Border styles can be used to program borders on buttons, sliders, and popup pages.  
Border Styles and Programming Numbers  
No.  
0-1  
2
Border styles  
No border  
Single line  
Double line  
Quad line  
No.  
Border styles  
10-11 Picture frame  
12  
20  
21  
Double line  
Bevel-S  
3
4
Bevel-M  
5-6  
7
Circle 15  
22-23 Circle 15  
Single line  
Double line  
Quad line  
24-27 Neon inactive-S  
40-41 Diamond 55  
8
9
The TPDesign4 Touch Panel Design program has pre-set border styles that are user selectable.  
You cannot use the following number values for programming purposes when changing border  
styles. TPD4 border styles can ONLY be changed by using the name.  
TPD4 Border Styles by Name  
No.  
1
Border styles  
None  
No.  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
Border styles  
Circle 155  
2
AMX Elite -L  
AMX Elite -M  
AMX Elite -S  
Bevel -L  
Circle 165  
3
Circle 175  
4
Circle 185  
5
Circle 195  
6
Bevel -M  
Cursor Bottom  
Cursor Bottom with Hole  
Cursor Top  
7
Bevel -S  
8
Circle 15  
Circle 25  
Circle 35  
Circle 45  
Circle 55  
Circle 65  
Circle 75  
Circle 85  
Circle 95  
Circle 105  
Circle 115  
Circle 125  
Circle 135  
Circle 145  
9
Cursor Top with Hole  
Cursor Left  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
Cursor Left with Hole  
Cursor Right  
Cursor Right with Hole  
Custom Frame  
Diamond 15  
Diamond 25  
Diamond 35  
Diamond 45  
Diamond 55  
Diamond 65  
Diamond 75  
122  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
TPD4 Border Styles by Name (Cont.)  
No.  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
Border styles  
Diamond 85  
No.  
85  
Border styles  
Menu Bottom Rounded 65  
Menu Bottom Rounded 75  
Menu Bottom Rounded 85  
Menu Bottom Rounded 95  
Menu Bottom Rounded 105  
Menu Bottom Rounded 115  
Menu Bottom Rounded 125  
Menu Bottom Rounded 135  
Menu Bottom Rounded 145  
Menu Bottom Rounded 155  
Menu Bottom Rounded 165  
Menu Bottom Rounded 175  
Menu Bottom Rounded 185  
Menu Bottom Rounded 195  
Menu Top Rounded 15  
Menu Top Rounded 25  
Menu Top Rounded 35  
Menu Top Rounded 45  
Menu Top Rounded 55  
Menu Top Rounded 65  
Menu Top Rounded 75  
Menu Top Rounded 85  
Menu Top Rounded 95  
Menu Top Rounded 105  
Menu Top Rounded 115  
Menu Top Rounded 125  
Menu Top Rounded 135  
Menu Top Rounded 145  
Menu Top Rounded 155  
Menu Top Rounded 165  
Menu Top Rounded 175  
Menu Top Rounded 185  
Menu Top Rounded 195  
Menu Right Rounded 15  
Menu Right Rounded 25  
Menu Right Rounded 35  
Menu Right Rounded 45  
Menu Right Rounded 55  
Menu Right Rounded 65  
Menu Right Rounded 75  
Menu Right Rounded 85  
Menu Right Rounded 95  
Diamond 95  
86  
Diamond 105  
87  
Diamond 115  
88  
Diamond 125  
89  
Diamond 135  
90  
Diamond 145  
91  
Diamond 155  
92  
Diamond 165  
93  
Diamond 175  
94  
Diamond 185  
95  
Diamond 195  
96  
Double Bevel -L  
Double Bevel -M  
Double Bevel -S  
Double Line  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
Fuzzy  
Glow-L  
Glow-S  
Help Down  
Neon Active -L  
Neon Active -S  
Neon Inactive -L  
Neon Inactive -S  
Oval H 60x30  
Oval H 100x50  
Oval H 150x75  
Oval H 200x100  
Oval V 30x60  
Oval V 50x100  
Oval V 75x150  
Oval V 100x200  
Picture Frame  
Quad Line  
Single Line  
Windows Style Popup  
Windows Style Popup (Status Bar)  
Menu Bottom Rounded 15  
Menu Bottom Rounded 25  
Menu Bottom Rounded 35  
Menu Bottom Rounded 45  
Menu Bottom Rounded 55  
123  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
TPD4 Border Styles by Name (Cont.)  
No.  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
Border styles  
No.  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
Border styles  
Menu Right Rounded 105  
Menu Right Rounded 115  
Menu Right Rounded 125  
Menu Right Rounded 135  
Menu Right Rounded 145  
Menu Right Rounded 155  
Menu Right Rounded 165  
Menu Right Rounded 175  
Menu Right Rounded 185  
Menu Right Rounded 195  
Menu Left Rounded 15  
Menu Left Rounded 25  
Menu Left Rounded 35  
Menu Left Rounded 45  
Menu Left Rounded 55  
Menu Left Rounded 65  
Menu Left Rounded 75  
Menu Left Rounded 85  
Menu Left Rounded 95  
Menu Left Rounded 105  
Menu Left Rounded 115  
Menu Left Rounded 125  
Menu Left Rounded 135  
Menu Left Rounded 145  
Menu Left Rounded 155  
Menu Left Rounded 165  
Menu Left Rounded 175  
Menu Left Rounded 185  
Menu Left Rounded 195  
"^" Button Commands  
These Button Commands are used in NetLinx Studio and are case insensitive.  
All commands that begin with "^" have the capability of assigning a variable text address range and  
button state range. A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with  
values for the Device: Port : System (in all programming examples - Panel is used in place of  
these values).  
Variable text ranges allow you to target 1 or more variable text channels in a single  
command.  
Button State ranges allow you to target 1 or more states of a variable text button with a  
single command.  
"." Character is used for the 'through' notation, also the "&" character is used for the  
'And' notation.  
124  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
"^" Button Commands  
^ANI  
Syntax:  
Run a button  
animation  
(in 1/10 second).  
"'^ANI-<vt addr range>,<start state>,<end state>,<time>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
start state = Beginning of button state (0= current state).  
end state = End of button state.  
time = In 1/10 second intervals.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ANI-500,1,25,100'"  
Runs a button animation at text range 500 from state 1 to state 25 for 10 second.  
Syntax:  
^APF  
Add page flip  
action to a button  
if it does not  
"'^APF-<vt addr range>,<page flip action>,<page name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
already exist.  
page flip action =  
Stan[dardPage] - Flip to standard page  
Prev[iousPage] - Flip to previous page  
Show[Popup] - Show Popup page  
Hide[Popup] - Hide Popup page  
Togg[lePopup] - Toggle popup state  
ClearG[roup] - Clear popup page group from all pages  
ClearP[age] - Clear all popup pages from a page with the  
specified page name  
ClearA[ll] - Clear all popup pages from all pages  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^APF-400,Stan,Main Page'"  
Assigns a button to a standard page flip with page name 'Main Page'.  
^BAT  
Syntax:  
Append  
"'^BAT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text>'"  
non-unicode text.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BAT-520,1,Enter City'"  
Appends the text 'Enter City' to the button’s OFF state.  
Same format as ^UNI.  
^BAU  
Append  
Syntax:  
unicode text.  
"'^BAU-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<unicode  
text>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
unicode text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Unicode characters must be entered in Hex  
format.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BAU-520,1,00770062'"  
Appends Unicode text '00770062' to the button’s OFF state.  
125  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BCB  
Only if the specified border color is not the same as the current color.  
Set the border  
color to the  
Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value  
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
specified color.  
Syntax:  
"'^BCB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color  
value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 119 for more  
information.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCB-500.504&510,1,12'"  
Sets the Off state border color to 12 (Yellow). Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color  
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).  
Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 119.  
^BCF  
Only if the specified fill color is not the same as the current color.  
Set the fill color to Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value  
the specified  
color.  
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
Syntax:  
"'^BCF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color  
value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 119 for more  
information.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,12'"  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,Yellow'"  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,#F4EC0A63''"  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,#F4EC0A'"  
Sets the Off state fill color by color number. Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color  
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).  
126  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BCT  
Only if the specified text color is not the same as the current color.  
Set the text color Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value  
to the specified  
color.  
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
Syntax:  
"'^BCT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color  
value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 119 for more  
information.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCT-500.504&510,1,12'"  
Sets the Off state border color to 12 (Yellow). Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color  
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).  
^BDO  
Determines what order each layer of the button is drawn.  
Syntax:  
Set the button  
draw order.  
"'^BDO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<1-5><1-5><1-  
5><1-5><1-5>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
layer assignments = Fill Layer  
= 1  
Image Layer = 2  
Icon Layer = 3  
Text Layer = 4  
Border Layer = 5  
Note: The layer assignments are from bottom to top. The default draw order is 12345.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BDO-530,1&2,51432'"  
Sets the button’s variable text 530 ON/OFF state draw order (from bottom to top) to  
Border, Fill, Text, Icon, and Image.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BDO-1,0,12345'"  
Sets all states of a button back to its default drawing order.  
ONLY works on General-type buttons.  
^BFB  
Set the feedback Syntax:  
type of the button.  
"'^BFB-<vt addr range>,<feedback type>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
feedback type = (None, Channel, Invert, On (Always on), Momentary, and Blink).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BFB-500,Momentary'"  
Sets the Feedback type of the button to 'Momentary'.  
127  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BIM  
Syntax:  
Set the input  
mask for the  
specified address.  
"'^BIM-<vt addr range>,<input mask>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
input mask = Refer to the Text Area Input Masking section on page 170 for character  
types.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BIM-500,AAAAAAAAAA'"  
Sets the input mask to ten ’A’ characters, that are required, to either a letter or digit  
(entry is required).  
^BLN  
The maximum number of lines to remove is 240. A value of 0 will display the incoming  
video signal unaffected. This command is used to scale non 4x3 video images into non  
4x3 video buttons.  
Set the number of  
lines removed  
equally from the  
top and bottom of  
a composite video  
signal.  
Syntax:  
"'^BLN-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<number of  
lines>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
number of lines = 0 - 240.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BLN-500,55'"  
Equally removes 55 lines from the top and 55 lines from the bottom of the video button.  
128  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BMC  
Note that the source is a single button state. Each state must be copied as a separate  
command. The <codes> section represents what attributes will be copied. All codes are  
2 char pairs that can be separated by comma, space, percent or just ran together.  
Button copy  
command.  
Copy attributes of Syntax:  
the source button  
"'^BMC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<source  
port>,<source address>,<source state>,<codes>'"  
to all the  
destination  
buttons.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
source port = 1 - 100.  
source address = 1 - 4000.  
source state = 1 - 256.  
codes: BM - Picture/Bitmap  
BR - Border  
CB - Border Color  
CF - Fill Color  
CT - Text Color  
EC - Text effect color  
EF - Text effect  
FT - Font  
IC - Icon  
JB - Bitmap alignment  
JI - Icon alignment  
JT - Text alignment  
LN - Lines of video removed  
OP - Opacity  
SO - Button Sound  
TX - Text  
VI - Video slot ID  
WW - Word wrap on/off  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-425,1,1,500,1,BR'"  
or  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-425,1,1,500,1,%BR'"  
Copies the OFF state border of button with a variable text address of 500 onto the OFF  
state border of button with a variable text address of 425.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-  
150,1,1,315,1,%BR%FT%TX%BM%IC%CF%CT'"  
Copies the OFF state border, font, Text, bitmap, icon, fill color and text color of the button  
with a variable text address of 315 onto the OFF state border, font, Text, bitmap, icon, fill  
color and text color of the button with a variable text address of 150.  
129  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BMF  
Syntax:  
Set any/all button  
parameters by  
sending  
embedded codes  
and data.  
"'^BMF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<data>'"  
Variables:  
variable text address char array = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
level range = 1 - 600 (level value is 1 - 65535).  
data:  
’%R<left>,<top>,<right>,<bottom>’’ = Set Recetangle.  
’%B<border style>’ = Set the border style name. See the Border Styles and  
Programming Numbers table on page 122.  
’%B’,<border 0-27,40,41> = Set the borer style number. See the Border Styles and  
Programming Numbers table on page 122.  
’%DO<1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5> = Set the draw order. Listed from bottom to top.  
Refer to the ^BDO command on page 127 for more information.  
’%F’,<font 1-8,10,11,20-29,32-xx> = Set the font. See the Default Font Styles and ID  
Numbers table on page 121.  
’%F<font 01-08,10,11,20-29,32-xx>’ = Set the font. See the Default Font Styles and ID  
Numbers table on page 121.  
’%MI<mask image>’ = Set the mask image. Refer to the ^BMI command on page 132 for  
more information.  
’%T<text >’ = Set the text using ASCII characters (empty is clear).  
’%P<bitmap>’ = Set the picture/bitmap filename (empty is clear).  
’%I’,<icon 01-9900, 0-clear>’ = Set the icon using values of 01 - 9900 (icon numbers are  
assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab - Slots section).  
’%I<icon 01-9900, 0-clear>’ = Set the icon using values of 01 - 9900 (icon numbers are  
assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab - Slots section).  
’%J’,<alignment of text 1-9> = As shown the following telephone keypad alignment chart:  
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
2
5
8
Zero can be used for an absolute position  
’%JT<alignment of text 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart,  
BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’  
’%JB<alignment of bitmap/picture 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad  
alignment chart BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’  
’%JI<alignment of icon 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart,  
BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’  
130  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BMF  
For some of these commands and values, refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic  
(Cont.)  
Colors table on page 119.  
’%CF<on fill color>’ = Set Fill Color.  
’%CB<on border color>’ = Set Border Color.  
’%CT<on text color>’ = Set Text Color.  
’%SW<1 or 0>’ = Show/hide a button.  
’%ST<style>’ = Button style.  
’%SO<sound>’ = Set the button sound.  
’%EN<1 or 0>’ = Enable/disable a button.  
’%WW<1 or 0>’ = Word wrap On/Off.  
’%GH<bargraph hi>’ = Set the bargraph upper limit.  
’%GL<bargraph low>’ = Set the bargraph lower limit.  
’%GN<bargraph slider name>’ = Set the bargraph slider name/Joystick cursor name.  
’%GC<bargraph slider color>’ = Set the bargraph slider color/Joystick cursor color.  
’%GI<bargraph invert>’ = Set the bargraph invert/noninvert or joystick coordinate  
(0,1,2,3). See the ^GIV command on page 138 for more information.  
’%GU<bargraph ramp up>’ = Set the bargraph ramp up time in intervals of 1/10 second.  
’%GD<bargraph ramp down>’ = Set the bargraph ramp down time in 1/10 second.  
’%GG<bargraph drag increment> = Set the bargraph drag increment. Refer to the ^GDI  
command on page 138 for more information.  
’%VI<video ON/OFF>’ = Set the Video either ON (value=1) or OFF (value=0).  
’%OT<feedback type>’ = Set the Feedback (Output) Type to one of the following:  
None, Channel,Invert, ON (Always ON), Momentary, or Blink.  
’%SM’ = Submit a text for text area button.  
’%SF<1 or 0>’ = Set the focus for text area button.  
’%OP<0-255>’ = Set the button opacity to either Invisible (value=0) or Opaque  
(value=255).  
’%OP#<00-FF>’ = Set the button opacity to either Invisible (value=00) or Opaque  
(value=FF).  
’%UN<Unicode text>’ = Set the Unicode text. See the ^UNI section on page 143 for the  
text format.  
’%LN<0-240>’ = Set the lines of video being removed. See the ^BLN section on  
page 128 for more information.  
’%EF<text effect name>’ = Set the text effect.  
’%EC<text effect color>’ = Set the text effect color.  
’%ML<max length>’ = Set the maximum length of a text area.  
’%MK<input mask>’ = Set the input mask of a text area.  
’%VL<0-1>’ = Log-On/Log-Off the computer control connection  
’%VN<network name>’ = Set network connection name.  
’%VP<password>’ = Set the network connection password.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMF-500,1,%B10%CFRed%CB Blue  
%CTBlack%Ptest.png'"  
Sets the button OFF state as well as the Border, Fill Color, Border Color, Text Color, and  
Bitmap.  
131  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BMI  
Mask image is used to crop a borderless button to a non-square shape. This is typically  
used with a bitmap.  
Set the button  
mask image.  
Syntax:  
"'^BMI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<mask  
image>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
mask image = Graphic file used.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMI-530,1&2,newMac.png'"  
Sets the button with variable text 530 ON/OFF state mask image to 'newmac.png'.  
^BML  
If this value is set to zero (0) there is no max length. The maximum length available is  
2000. This is only for a Text area input button and not for a Text area input masking button.  
Set the maximum  
length of the text  
area button.  
Syntax:  
"'^BML-<vt addr range>,<max length>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
max length = 2000 (0=no max length).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BML-500,20'"  
Sets the maximum length of the text area input button to 20 characters.  
Syntax:  
^BMP  
Assign a picture to  
those buttons with  
a defined address  
range.  
"'^BMP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<name of  
bitmap/picture>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
name of bitmap/picture = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMP-500.504&510.515,1,bitmap.png'"  
Sets the OFF state picture for the buttons with variable text ranges of 500-504 & 510-515.  
Syntax:  
^BNC  
Clear current  
TakeNote  
annotations.  
"'^BNC-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
command value = (0= clear, 1= clear all).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNC-973,0'"  
Clears the annotation of the TakeNote button with variable text 973.  
132  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BNN  
Syntax:  
Set the TakeNote  
network name for  
the specified  
"'^BNN-<vt addr range>,<network name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
network name = Use a valid IP Address.  
Example:  
Addresses.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNN-973,192.168.169.99'"  
Sets the TakeNote button network name to 192.168.169.99.  
Syntax:  
^BNT  
Set the TakeNote  
network port for  
the specified  
"'^BNT-<vt addr range>,<network port>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
network port = 1 - 65535.  
Addresses.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNT-973,5000'"  
Sets the TakeNote button network port to 5000.  
^BOP  
The button opacity can be specified as a decimal between 0 - 255, where zero (0) is  
invisible and 255 is opaque, or as a HEX code, as used in the color commands by  
preceding the HEX code with the # sign. In this case, #00 becomes invisible and #FF  
becomes opaque. If the opacity is set to zero (0), this does not make the button inactive,  
only invisible.  
Set the button  
opacity.  
Syntax:  
"'^BOP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<button  
opacity>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
button opacity = 0 (invisible) - 255 (opaque).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOP-500.504&510.515,1,200'"  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOP-500.504&510.515,1,#C8'"  
Both examples set the opacity of the buttons with the variable text range of 500-504 and  
510-515 to 200.  
133  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BOR  
Refer to the Border Styles and Programming Numbers table on page 122 for more  
information.  
Set a border to a  
specific border  
style associated  
with a border  
value for those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Syntax:  
"'^BOR-<vt addr range>,<border style name or border  
value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
border style name = Refer to the Border Styles and Programming Numbers table on  
page 122.  
border value = 0 - 41.  
Examples:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOR-500.504&510.515,10'"  
Sets the border by number (#10) to those buttons with the variable text range of 500-504  
& 510-515.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOR-500.504&510,AMX Elite -M'"  
Sets the border by name (AMX Elite) to those buttons with the variable text range of  
500-504 & 510-515.  
The border style is available through the TPDesign4 border-style drop-down list. Refer to  
the TPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 122 for more information.  
^BOS  
Syntax:  
Set the button to  
display either a  
Video or  
Non-Video  
window.  
"'^BOS-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<video  
state>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
video state = Video Off = 0 and Video On = 1.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOS-500,1,1'"  
Sets the button to display video.  
^BPP  
Zero clears the flag.  
Set or clear the  
protected page  
flip flag of a  
button.  
Syntax:  
"'^BPP-<vt addr range>,<protected page flip flag value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
protected page flip flag value range = 0 - 4 (0 clears the flag).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BPP-500,1'"  
Sets the button to protected page flip flag 1 (sets it to password 1).  
134  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BRD  
Only if the specified border is not the same as the current border. The border names are  
available through the TPDesign4 border-name drop-down list.  
Set the border of  
a button state/  
states.  
Syntax:  
"'^BRD-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<border  
name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
border name = Refer to Border Styles and Programming Numbers table on page 122.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BRD-500.504&510.515,1&2,Quad Line'"  
Sets the border by name (Quad Line) to those buttons with the variable text range of  
500-504 & 510-515.  
Refer to the TPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 122.  
^BSF  
Note: Select one button at a time (single variable text address). Do not assign a variable  
text address range to set focus to multiple buttons. Only one variable text address can be  
in focus at a time.  
Set the focus to  
the text area.  
Syntax:  
"'^BSF-<vt addr range>,<selection value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
selection value = Unselect = 0 and select = 1.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSF-500,1'"  
Sets the focus to the text area of the button.  
This command causes the text areas to send their text as strings to the NetLinx Master.  
Syntax:  
^BSM  
Submit text for  
text area buttons.  
"'^BSM-<vt addr range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSM-500'"  
Submits the text of the text area button.  
^BSO  
If the sound name is blank the sound is then cleared. If the sound name is not matched,  
the button sound is not changed.  
Set the sound  
played when a  
button is pressed.  
Syntax:  
"'^BSO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<sound  
name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
sound name = (blank - sound cleared, not matched - button sound not changed).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSO-500,1&2,music.wav'"  
Assigns the sound 'music.wav' to the button Off/On states.  
135  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BVL  
Syntax:  
Log-On/Log-Off  
the computer  
control  
"'^BVL-<vt addr range>,<connection>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
connection.  
connection = 0 (Log-Off connection) and 1 (Log-On connection).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVL-500,0'"  
Logs-off the computer control connection of the button.  
^BVN  
Syntax:  
Set the network  
name for the  
specified address.  
"'^BVN-<vt addr range>,<network name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
network name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVN-500,191.191.191.191'"  
Sets the network name to ’191.191.191.191’ for the specific control button.  
^BVP  
Syntax:  
Set the network  
password for the  
specified address.  
"'^BVP-<vt addr range>,<network password>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
network password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVP-500,PCLOCK'"  
Sets the password to PCLOCK for the specific PC control button.  
^BVT  
Syntax:  
Set the computer  
control network  
port for the  
"'^BVT-<vt addr range>,<network port>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
specified address.  
network port = 1 - 65535.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVT-500,5000'"  
Sets the network port to 5000.  
^BWW  
By default, word-wrap is Off.  
Set the button  
word wrap  
feature to those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Syntax:  
"'^BWW-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<word wrap>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
word wrap = (0=Off and 1=On). Default is Off.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BWW-500,1,1'"  
Sets the word wrap on for the button’s Off state.  
136  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^CPF  
Syntax:  
Clear all page flips  
from a button.  
"'^CPF-<vt addr range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^CPF-500'"  
Clears all page flips from the button.  
Syntax:  
^DPF  
Delete page flips  
from button if it  
already exists.  
"'^DFP-<vt addr range>,<actions>,<page name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
actions =  
Stan[dardPage] - Flip to standard page  
Prev[iousPage] - Flip to previous page  
Show[Popup] - Show Popup page  
Hide[Popup] - Hide Popup page  
Togg[lePopup] - Toggle popup state  
ClearG[roup] - Clear popup page group from all pages  
ClearP[age] - Clear all popup pages from a page with the  
specified page name  
ClearA[ll] - Clear all popup pages from all pages  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^DPF-409,Prev'"  
Deletes the assignment of a button from flipping to a previous page.  
Syntax:  
^ENA  
Enable or  
disable buttons  
with a set  
variable text  
range.  
"'^ENA-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
command value = (0= disable, 1= enable)  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ENA-500.504&510.515,0'"  
Disables button pushes on buttons with variable text range 500-504 & 510-515.  
Font ID numbers are generated by the TPDesign4 programmers report.  
Syntax:  
^FON  
Set a font to a  
specific Font ID  
value for those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
"'^FON-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<font  
value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
font value = Range = 1 - XXX. Refer to the Default Font Styles and ID Numbers table on  
page 121.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^FON-500.504&510.515,1&2,4'"  
Sets the font size to font ID #4 for the On and Off states of buttons with the variable text  
range of 500-504 & 510-515.  
137  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
The Font ID is generated by TPD4 and is located in TPD4 through the Main menu.  
Panel > Generate Programmer's Report >Text Only Format >Readme.txt.  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^GDI  
Syntax:  
Change the  
bargraph drag  
increment.  
"'^GDI-<vt addr range>,<bargraph drag increment>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph drag increment = The default drag increment is 256.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GDI-7,128'"  
Sets the bargraph with variable text 7 to a drag increment of 128.  
^GIV  
Parameters 1,2, and 3 will cause a bargraph or slider to be inverted regardless of  
orientation. Their effect will be as described for joysticks.  
Invert the  
joystick axis to  
move the origin to  
another corner.  
Syntax:  
"'^GIV-<vt addr range>,<joystick axis to invert>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
joystick axis to invert = 0 - 3.  
0 = Normal  
0
2
1
3
1 = Invert horizontal axis  
2 = Invert vertical axis  
3 = Invert both axis locations  
For a bargraph 1 = Invert , 0 = Non Invert  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GIV-500,3'"  
Inverts the joystick axis origin to the bottom right corner.  
Syntax:  
^GLH  
Change the  
bargraph upper  
limit.  
"'^GLH-<vt addr range>,<bargraph hi>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph limit range = 1 - 65535 (bargraph upper limit range).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GLH-500,1000'"  
Changes the bargraph upper limit to 1000.  
Syntax:  
^GLL  
Change the  
bargraph lower  
limit.  
"'^GLL-<vt addr range>,<bargraph low>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph limit range = 1 - 65535 (bargraph lower limit range).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GLL-500,150'"  
Changes the bargraph lower limit to 150.  
138  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^GRD  
Syntax:  
Change the  
bargraph  
ramp-down time in  
1/10th of a  
second.  
"'^GRD-<vt addr range>,<bargraph ramp down time>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph ramp down time = In 1/10th of a second intervals.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GRD-500,200'"  
Changes the bargraph ramp down time to 20 seconds.  
Syntax:  
^GRU  
Change the  
bargraph  
ramp-up time in  
1/10th of a  
second.  
"'^GRU-<vt addr range>,<bargraph ramp up time>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph ramp up time = In 1/10th of a second intervals.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GRU-500,100'"  
Changes the bargraph ramp up time to 10 seconds.  
A user can also assign the color by Name and R,G,B value (RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
Syntax:  
^GSC  
Change the  
bargraph slider  
color or joystick  
cursor color.  
"'^GSC-<vt addr range>,<color value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 119.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GSC-500,12'"  
Changes the bargraph or joystick slider color to Yellow.  
^GSN  
Slider names and cursor names can be found in the TPDesign4 slider name and cursor  
drop-down list.  
Change the  
bargraph slider  
name or joystick  
cursor name.  
Syntax:  
"'^GSN-<vt addr range>,<bargraph slider name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph slider name = See table below.  
Bargraph Slider Names:  
None  
Circle -L  
Ball  
Precision  
Circle -S  
Circle -M  
Rectangle -L  
Windows  
Rectangle -S  
Rectangle -M  
Windows Active  
Joystick Cursor Names:  
None  
Circle  
Hand  
Target  
Ball  
Arrow  
Crosshairs  
Gunsight  
Spiral  
Metal  
View Finder  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GSN-500,Ball'"  
Changes the bargraph slider name or the Joystick cursor name to ’Ball’.  
139  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^ICO  
Syntax:  
Set the icon to a  
button.  
"'^ICO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<icon  
index>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
icon index range = 0 - 9900 (a value of 0 is clear).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ICO-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"  
Sets the icon for On and Off states for buttons with variable text ranges of 500-504 &  
510-515.  
^JSB  
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative  
to the upper left corner of the button.  
Set bitmap/  
picture alignment Syntax:  
using a numeric  
"'^JSB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text  
alignment>'"  
keypad layout for  
those buttons with  
a defined address  
range.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new text alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:  
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
2
5
8
Zero can be used for an absolute position  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JSB-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"  
Sets the off/on state picture alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable  
text ranges of 500-504 & 510-515.  
^JSI  
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative  
to the upper left corner of the button.  
Set icon  
alignment using a Syntax:  
numeric keypad  
"'^JSI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new icon  
alignment>'"  
layout for those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new icon alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:  
0
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JSI-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"  
Sets the Off/On state icon alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable  
text range of 500-504 & 510-515.  
140  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^JST  
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative  
to the upper left corner of the button.  
Set text  
alignment using a Syntax:  
numeric keypad  
"'^JST-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text  
alignment>'"  
layout for those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new text alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:  
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
2
5
8
Zero can be used for an absolute position  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JST-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"  
Sets the text alignment to the upper left corner for those buttons with variable text ranges  
of 500-504 & 510-515.  
^MBT  
Syntax:  
Set the Mouse  
"'^MBT-<pass data>'"  
Button mode On  
for the virtual PC.  
Variable:  
pass data:  
0 = None  
1 = Left  
2 = Right  
3 = Middle  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^MBT-1'"  
Sets the mouse button mode to ’Left Mouse Click’.  
^MDC  
Syntax:  
Turn On the  
’Mouse  
double-click’  
feature for the  
virtual PC.  
"'^MDC'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^MDC'"  
Sets the mouse double-click for use with the virtual PC.  
Syntax:  
^SHO  
Show or hide a  
button with a set  
variable text  
range.  
"'^SHO-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
command value = (0= hide, 1= show).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^SHO-500.504&510.515,0'"  
Hides buttons with variable text address range 500-504 & 510-515.  
141  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^TEC  
The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4. You can also assign the  
color by name or RGB value (RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
Set the text effect  
color for the  
specified  
addresses/states  
to the specified  
color.  
Syntax:  
"'^TEC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color  
value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
color value = Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 119.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TEC-500.504&510.515,1&2,12'"  
Sets the text effect color to Very Light Yellow on buttons with variable text 500-504  
and 510-515.  
^TEF  
The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4.  
Set the text effect. Syntax:  
"'^TEF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<text effect  
name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
text effect name = Refer to the Text Effects table on page 144 for a listing of text  
effect names.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TEF-500.504&510.515,1&2,Soft Drop  
Shadow 3'"  
Sets the text effect to Soft Drop Shadow 3 for the button with variable text range 500-504  
and 510-515.  
^TXT  
Sets Non-Unicode text.  
Assign a text  
string to those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Syntax:  
"'^TXT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TXT-500.504&510.515,1&2,Test Only'"  
Sets the On and Off state text for buttons with the variable text ranges of  
500-504 & 510-515.  
142  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^UNI  
For the ^UNI command (%UN and ^BMF command), the Unicode text is sent as  
ASCII-HEX nibbles.  
Set Unicode text.  
Syntax:  
"'^UNI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<unicode  
text>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
unicode text = Unicode HEX value.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^UNI-500,1,0041'"  
Sets the button’s unicode character to ’A’.  
Note: To send the variable text ’A’ in unicode to all states of the variable text  
button 1, (for which the character code is 0041 Hex), send the following command:  
SEND_COMMAND TP,"'^UNI-1,0,0041'"  
Note: Unicode is always represented in a HEX value. TPD4 generates (through the  
Text Enter Box dialog) unicode HEX values. Refer to the TPDesign4 Instruction  
Manual for more information.  
143  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Text Effect Names  
The following is a listing of text effects names. This list is associated with the ^TEF command on  
Text Effects  
• Glow -S  
• Hard Drop Shadow 6  
• Glow -M  
• Hard Drop Shadow 7  
• Glow -L  
• Hard Drop Shadow 8  
• Glow -X  
• Soft Drop Shadow 1 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 2 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 3 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 4 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 5 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 6 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 7 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 8 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 1 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 2 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 3 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 4 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 5 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 6 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 7 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 8 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 1 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 2 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 3 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 4 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 5 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 6 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 7 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 8 with outline  
• Outline -S  
• Outline -M  
• Outline -L  
• Outline -X  
• Soft Drop Shadow 1  
• Soft Drop Shadow 2  
• Soft Drop Shadow 3  
• Soft Drop Shadow 4  
• Soft Drop Shadow 5  
• Soft Drop Shadow 6  
• Soft Drop Shadow 7  
• Soft Drop Shadow 8  
• Medium Drop Shadow 1  
• Medium Drop Shadow 2  
• Medium Drop Shadow 3  
• Medium Drop Shadow 4  
• Medium Drop Shadow 5  
• Medium Drop Shadow 6  
• Medium Drop Shadow 7  
• Medium Drop Shadow 8  
• Hard Drop Shadow 1  
• Hard Drop Shadow 2  
• Hard Drop Shadow 3  
• Hard Drop Shadow 4  
• Hard Drop Shadow 5  
144  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Button Query Commands  
Button Query commands reply back with a custom event. There will be one custom event for each  
button/state combination. Each query is assigned a unique custom event type. The following  
example is for debug purposes only:  
NetLinx Example: CUSTOM_EVENT[device, Address, Custom event type]  
DEFINE_EVENT  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1001]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1002]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1003]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1004]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1005]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1006]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1007]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1008]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1009]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1010]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1011]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1012]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1013]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1014]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1015]  
// Text  
// Bitmap  
// Icon  
// Text Justification  
// Bitmap Justification  
// Icon Justification  
// Font  
// Text Effect Name  
// Text Effect Color  
// Word Wrap  
// ON state Border Color  
// ON state Fill Color  
// ON state Text Color  
// Border Name  
// Opacity  
{
Send_String 0,"'ButtonGet Id=',ITOA(CUSTOM.ID),'  
Type=',ITOA(CUSTOM.TYPE)"  
Send_String 0,"'Flag =',ITOA(CUSTOM.FLAG)"  
Send_String 0,"'VALUE1 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE1)"  
Send_String 0,"'VALUE2 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE2)"  
Send_String 0,"'VALUE3 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE3)"  
Send_String 0,"'TEXT =',CUSTOM.TEXT"  
Send_String 0,"'TEXT LENGTH =',ITOA(LENGTH_STRING(CUSTOM.TEXT))"  
}
145  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
All custom events have the following 6 fields:  
Custom Event Fields  
Field  
Description  
Uint Flag  
0 means text is a standard string, 1 means Unicode encoded string  
button state number  
slong value1  
slong value2  
slong value3  
string text  
actual length of string (this is not encoded size)  
index of first character (usually 1 or same as optional index  
the text from the button  
text length (string encode)  
button text length  
These fields are populated differently for each query command. The text length (String Encode)  
field is not used in any command.  
Button Query Commands  
?BCB  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
border color.  
"'?BCB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1011:  
Flag - zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)  
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCB-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' border color. information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1011  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = #222222FF  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
146  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?BCF  
Syntax:  
Get the current fill  
color.  
"'?BCF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1012:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)  
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCF-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' fill color information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1012  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = #FF8000FF  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
?BCT  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
text color.  
"'?BCT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1013:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)  
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCT-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text color information.  
The result sent to Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1013  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = #FFFFFEFF  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
147  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?BMP  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
bitmap name.  
"'?BMP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1002:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - String that represents the bitmap name  
Text length - Bitmap name text length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BMP-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' bitmap information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1002  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = Buggs.png  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
?BOP  
Syntax:  
Get the overall  
button opacity.  
"'?BOP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1015:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Opacity  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BOP-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' opacity information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1015  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 200  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
148  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?BRD  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
border name.  
"'?BRD-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1014:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - String that represents border name  
Text length - Border name length  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BRD-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' border information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1014  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 22  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = Double Bevel Raised -L  
TEXT LENGTH = 22  
?BWW  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
word wrap flag  
status.  
"'?BWW-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1010:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - 0 = no word wrap, 1 = word wrap  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BWW-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' word wrap flag status information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1010  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 1  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
149  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?FON  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
font index.  
"'?FON-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1007:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Font index  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?FON-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' font type index information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1007  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 72  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
Syntax:  
=
?ICO  
Get the current  
icon index.  
"'?ICO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1003:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Icon Index  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?ICO-529,1&2'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' icon index information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1003  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 2  
VALUE2 = 12  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
150  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?JSB  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
bitmap  
justification.  
"'?JSB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1005:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JSB-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' bitmap justification information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1005  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 5  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
Syntax:  
=
?JSI  
Get the current  
icon  
justification.  
"'?JSI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1006:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JSI-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' icon justification information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1006  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 6  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
151  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?JST  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
text  
justification.  
"'?JST-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1004:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JST-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text justification information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1004  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 1  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
Syntax:  
=
?TEC  
Get the current  
text effect color.  
"'?TEC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1009:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)  
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TEC-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text effect color information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1009  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = #5088F2AE  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
152  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?TEF  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
text effect name.  
"'?TEF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1008:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - String that represents the text effect name  
Text length - Text effect name length  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TEF-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text effect name information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1008  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 18  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = Hard Drop Shadow 3  
TEXT LENGTH = 18  
?TXT  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
text information.  
"'?TXT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<optional  
index>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
optional index = This is used if a string was too long to get back in one command.  
The reply will start at this index.  
custom event type 1001:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string  
Value3 - Index  
Text - Text from the button  
Text length - Button text length  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TXT-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1001  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 14  
VALUE3 = 1  
TEXT = This is a test  
TEXT LENGTH = 14  
153  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Panel Runtime Operations  
Serial Commands are used in the AxcessX Terminal Emulator mode. These commands are case  
insensitive.  
Panel Runtime Operation Commands  
ABEEP  
Syntax:  
Output a single  
beep even if beep  
is Off.  
"'ABEEP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'ABEEP'"  
Outputs a beep of duration 1 beep even if beep is Off.  
Syntax:  
ADBEEP  
Output a double  
beep even if beep  
is Off.  
"'ADBEEP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'ADBEEP'"  
Outputs a double beep even if beep is Off.  
@AKB  
Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost. The Prompt Text  
is optional.  
Pop up the  
keyboard icon and Syntax:  
initialize the text  
"'@AKB-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
string to that  
specified.  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKB-Texas;Enter State'"  
Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string 'Texas' with prompt text 'Enter State'.  
AKEYB  
Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost.  
Pop up the  
Syntax:  
keyboard icon and  
initialize the text  
string to that  
specified.  
"'AKEYB-<initial text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEYB-This is a Test'"  
Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string 'This is a Test'.  
The keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost.  
Syntax:  
AKEYP  
Pop up the  
keypad icon and  
initialize the text  
string to that  
specified.  
"'AKEYP-<number string>'"  
Variables:  
number string = 0 - 9999.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEP-12345'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '12345'.  
AKEYR  
Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using 'AKEYB', 'AKEYP', 'PKEYP',  
@AKB, @AKP, @PKP, @EKP, or @TKP commands.  
Remove the  
Keyboard/  
Keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'AKEYR'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEYR'"  
Removes the Keyboard/Keypad.  
154  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)  
@AKP  
Keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost. The Prompt Text  
is optional.  
Pop up the  
keypad icon and  
initialize the text  
string to that  
specified.  
Syntax:  
"'@AKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKP-12345678;ENTER PASSWORD'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '12345678' with prompt text ’ENTER  
PASSWORD’.  
@AKR  
Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using 'AKEYB', 'AKEYP', 'PKEYP',  
@AKB, @AKP, @PKP, @EKP, or @TKP commands.  
Remove the  
Keyboard/  
Keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'@AKR'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKR'"  
Removes the Keyboard/Keypad.  
Syntax:  
BEEP  
Output a beep.  
"'BEEP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'BEEP'"  
Outputs a beep.  
BRIT  
Syntax:  
Set the panel  
brightness.  
"'BRIT-<brightness level>'"  
Variable:  
brightness level = 0 - 100.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'BRIT-50'"  
Sets the brightness level to 50.  
Syntax:  
@BRT  
Set the panel  
brightness.  
"'@BRT-<brightness level>'"  
Variable:  
brightness level = 0 - 100.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@BRT-70'"  
Sets the brightness level to 70.  
Syntax:  
DBEEP  
Output a  
"'DBEEP'"  
double beep.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'DBEEP'"  
Outputs a double beep.  
155  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)  
@EKP  
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. The Prompt Text is  
optional.  
Extend the  
Keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'@EKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@EKP-33333333;Enter Password'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '33333333' with prompt text 'Enter  
Password'.  
PKEYP  
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. Keypad displays a  
'*' instead of the numbers typed. The Prompt Text is optional.  
Present a private  
keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'PKEYP-<initial text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'PKEYP-123456789'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '123456789' in '*'.  
@PKP  
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. Keypad displays a  
'*' instead of the numbers typed. The Prompt Text is optional.  
Present a private  
keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'@PKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@PKP-1234567;ENTER PASSWORD'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 'ENTER PASSWORD' in '*'.  
SETUP  
Syntax:  
Send panel to  
SETUP page.  
"'SETUP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SETUP'"  
Sends the panel to the Setup Page.  
Syntax:  
SHUTDOWN  
Shut down the  
batteriesproviding  
power to the  
panel.  
"'SHUTDOWN'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SHUTDOWN'"  
Shuts-down the batteries feeding power to the panel. This function saves the battery from  
discharging.  
SLEEP  
Syntax:  
Force the panel  
into screen saver  
mode.  
"'SLEEP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SLEEP'"  
Forces the panel into screen saver mode.  
156  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)  
@SOU  
Syntax:  
Play a sound file.  
"'@SOU-<sound name>'"  
Variables:  
sound name = Name of the sound file. Supported sound file formats are: WAV & MP3.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@SOU-Music.wav'"  
Plays the 'Music.wav' file.  
@TKP  
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. The Prompt Text is  
optional.  
Present a  
telephone  
keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'@TKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@TKP-999.222.1211;Enter Phone  
Number'"  
Pops-up the Keypad and initializes the text string '999.222.1211' with prompt text 'Enter  
Phone Number'.  
TPAGEON  
This command turns On page tracking, whereby when the page or popups change, a  
string is sent to the Master. This string may be captured with a CREATE_BUFFER  
command for one panel and sent directly to another panel.  
Turn On page  
tracking.  
Syntax:  
"'TPAGEON'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'TPAGEON'"  
Turns On page tracking.  
TPAGEOFF  
Syntax:  
Turn Off page  
tracking.  
"'TPAGEOFF'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'TPAGEOFF'"  
Turns Off page tracking.  
@VKB  
Syntax:  
Popup the  
virtual  
keyboard.  
"'@VKB'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@VKB'"  
Pops-up the virtual keyboard.  
Syntax:  
WAKE  
Force the panel  
out of screen  
saver mode.  
"'WAKE'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'WAKE'"  
Forces the panel out of the screen saver mode.  
157  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Programming  
Input Commands  
These Send Commands are case insensitive.  
Input Commands  
^CAL  
Syntax:  
Put panel in  
"'^CAL'"  
calibration mode.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^CAL'"  
Puts the panel in calibration mode.  
^KPS  
Syntax:  
Set the  
"'^KPS-<pass data>'"  
keyboard  
passthru.  
Variable:  
pass data:  
<blank/empty> = Disables the keyboard.  
0 = Pass data to G4 application (default). This can be used with VPC or text areas.  
1 - 4 = Not used.  
5 = Sends out data to the Master.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^KPS-5'"  
Sets the keyboard passthru to the Master. Option 5 sends keystrokes directly to the  
Master via the Send Output String mechanism. This process sends a virtual keystroke  
command (^VKS) to the Master.  
Example 2:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^KPS-0'"  
Disables the keyboard passthru to the Master.  
The following point defines how the parameters within this command work:  
• Accepts keystrokes from any of these sources: attached USB keyboard or Virtual  
keyboard.  
^VKS  
Key presses and key releases are not distinguished except in the case of CTRL, ALT, and  
SHIFT.  
Send one or more  
virtual key strokes Refer to the Embedded Codes table on page 159 that define special characters which  
to the G4  
can be included with the string but may not be represented by the ASCII character set.  
application.  
Syntax:  
"'^VKS-<string>'"  
Variable:  
string = Only 1 string per command/only one stroke per command.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^VKS-'8"  
Sends out the keystroke 'backspace' to the G4 application.  
158  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Embedded codes  
The following is a list of G4 compatible embedded codes:  
Embedded Codes  
Decimal numbers  
8
Hexidecimal values  
($08)  
($0D)  
($1B)  
($80)  
($81)  
($82)  
($83)  
($84)  
($85)  
($86)  
($87)  
($88)  
($89)  
($8A)  
($8B)  
($8C)  
($8D)  
($8E)  
($8F)  
($90)  
($91)  
($92)  
($93)  
($94)  
($95)  
($96)  
($97)  
($98)  
($99)  
($9A)  
($9B)  
($9C)  
($9D)  
($9E)  
($9F)  
($A0)  
($A1)  
($A2)  
($C0)  
($C1)  
($C2)  
Virtual keystroke  
Backspace  
Enter  
13  
27  
ESC  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
192  
193  
194  
CTRL key down  
ALT key down  
Shift key down  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
F10  
F11  
F12  
Num Lock  
Caps Lock  
Insert  
Delete  
Home  
End  
Page Up  
Page Down  
Scroll Lock  
Pause  
Break  
Print Screen  
SYSRQ  
Tab  
Windows  
Menu  
Up Arrow  
Down Arrow  
Left Arrow  
Right Arrow  
CTRL key up  
ALT key up  
Shift key up  
159  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Panel Setup Commands  
These commands are case insensitive.  
Panel Setup Commands  
^MUT  
Syntax:  
Set the panel  
mute state.  
"'^MUT-<mute state>'"  
Variable:  
mute state= 0 = Mute Off and 1 = Mute On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^MUT-1''"  
Sets the panel’s master volume to mute.  
@PWD sets the level 1 password only.  
Syntax:  
@PWD  
Set the page flip  
password.  
"'@PWD-<page flip password>'"  
Variables:  
page flip password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@PWD-Main'"  
Sets the page flip password to 'Main'.  
Password level is required and must be 1 - 4.  
Syntax:  
^PWD  
Set the page flip  
password.  
"'^PWD-<password level>,<page flip password>'"  
Variables:  
password level = 1 - 4.  
page flip password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^PWD-1,Main'"  
Sets the page flip password on Password Level 1 to 'Main'.  
Syntax:  
^VOL  
Set the panel  
volume.  
"'^VOL-<volume level>'"  
Variable:  
volume level = 0 - 100. 100 is maximum volume setting.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^VOL-50'"  
Set the panel volume to 50.  
160  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Dynamic Image Commands  
The following is a listing and descriptions of Dynamic Image Commands.  
Dynamic Image Commands  
^BBR  
Syntax:  
Set the bitmap of  
a button to use a  
particular  
"'^BBR-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<resource  
name>'"  
Variable:  
resource.  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BBR-700,1,Sports_Image'"  
Sets the resource name of the button to ’Sports_Image’.  
^RAF  
^RFR  
See page 162.  
Syntax:  
Force a refresh for  
a given resource.  
"'^RFR-<resource name>'"  
Variable:  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RFR-Sports_Image'"  
Forces a refresh on ’Sports_Image’.  
Syntax:  
^RMF  
Modify an  
existing resource.  
"'^RMF-<resource name>,<data>'"  
Variable:  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters  
data = Refer to the table in the RAF command for more information.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RMF-Sports_Image%ALab_Test/  
Images%Ftest.jpg'"  
Changes the resource ’Sports_Image’ file name to ’test.jpg’ and the path to ’Lab_Test/  
Images’.  
^RSR  
Syntax:  
Change the  
refresh rate for a  
given resource.  
"'^RSR-<resource name>,<refresh rate>'"  
Variable:  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
refresh rate = Measured in seconds.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RSR-Sports_Image,5'"  
Sets the refresh rate to 5 seconds for the given resource (’Sports_Image’).  
161  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Dynamic Image Commands (Cont.)  
^RAF  
Adds any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data.  
Add new  
Syntax:  
resources.  
"'^RAF-<resource name>,<data>'"  
Variable:  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
data = Refers to the embedded codes, see table below.  
Embedded Codes:  
Parameter  
protocol  
user  
Description  
Embedded Code  
’%P<0-1>’  
Set protocol. HTTP (0) or FTP (1).  
Set Username for authentication.  
’%U<user>’  
password  
host  
Set Password for authentication.  
’%S<password>’  
’%H<host>’  
Set Host Name (fully qualified  
DNS or IP Address).  
file  
Full path to the location of the file or  
program that will return the resource.  
The path must be a valid HTTP URL  
minus the protocol and host. The  
only exception to this is the inclusion  
of special escape sequences and in  
the case of the FTP protocol, regular  
expressions.  
’%F<file>’  
path  
Set Directory path. The path must  
be a valid HTTP URL minus the  
protocol, host, and filename. The  
only exception to this is the  
’%A<path>’  
inclusion of special escape  
sequences and in the case of the  
FTP protocol, regular expressions.  
refresh  
The number of seconds between  
refreshes in which the resource is  
downloaded again. Refreshing a  
resource causes the button  
’%R<refresh 1-65535>’  
displaying that resource to refresh  
also. The default value is 0 (only  
download the resource once).  
Set the newest file. A value of 1  
means that only the most recent file  
matching the pattern is downloaded.  
newest  
’%N<0-1>’  
’%V<0-1>’  
Set the value of the preserve flag.  
Default is 0. Currently preserve has  
no function.  
preserve  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RAF-New Image,%P0%HAMX.COM%ALab/  
Test_file%Ftest.jpg'"  
Adds a new resource. The resource name is ’New Image’, %P (protocol) is an HTTP, %H  
(host name) is AMX.COM, %A (file path) is Lab/Test file, and %F (file name) is test.jpg.  
162  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
This section describes the solutions to possible hardware/firmware issues that could arise during the  
common operation of a Modero touch panel.  
Troubleshooting Information  
Symptom  
Solution  
My USB drivers has a yellow  
exclamation point and doesn’t  
appear to be working.  
The USB driver was incorrectly installed and should be re-installed:  
• Power up the panel without the USB cable connected to the panel.  
• Plug in the USB cable into the G4 panel. You should see a USB icon  
show up in the System Tray.  
• Double click on the icon to bring up the list of USB devices (you  
should see the "AMX USB LAN LINK" device in the list).  
• If the "Install Driver" dialog doesn't appear automatically, select the  
"Properties" button and then the "Update Driver" button.  
• When the Install Driver dialog does appear, click Next to accept all  
the default prompts.  
• The OS will notify you that the driver you are installing/updating does  
not have a digital signature. This is acceptable, agree to continue the  
installation.  
• After installation is complete, the exclamation point should disappear.  
When using G4 WebControl to  
communicate with a target panel, a  
VNC Server dialog appears on my  
screen.  
• During a WebControl connection to a target panel you are prompted  
with a G4 Authentication dialog which asks you to enter the assigned  
password for the panel (before gaining access).  
• If you are ever prompted with a VNC Server dialog, you must enter  
the IP Address of the target panel. This can be found within the  
Setup > Protected Setup > System Connection page.  
- This IP Address of the panel appears within the IP Settings  
section of this page  
• Enter the IP Address and click OK. You will then be prompted with the  
G4 Authentication popup where you must enter the panel’s  
WebControl password.  
While attempting to communicate • A Green communication icon indicates that a connection has been  
directly with the Virtual Master (on  
the PC) via a USB connection, I  
can’t get my communication icon  
to turn Green.  
established to the target Master or target Virtual Master.  
• Launch NetLinx Studio and configure the Master Connection  
communication settings for a Virtual Master.  
• Navigate to the System connection page and toggle the  
Type field to USB.  
• Make sure the Type-A USB connector is securely connected to the  
PC.  
• Make sure the panel DOESN’T have the mini-USB connected and  
TURN OFF the panel.  
• Once the panel has turned ON THEN connect the mini-USB to the  
Program Port. The USB icon should appear in your system tray. If it  
• The panel can take a few minutes to detect the connection to the PC.  
163  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Information (Cont.)  
Symptom  
Solution  
I updated my panel firmware but  
my Battery Base page doesn’t  
seem to be working properly.  
• Cycle power manually to the panel and check the Battery Base page  
after startup.  
• Verify that you are using the most current v2.XX Modero firmware.  
• If downloading the firmware to the panel via a COM port, try using an  
IP Address and retry the download of the firmware to the panel.  
My Modero panel isn’t appearing  
in my Workspace window.  
• Verify that the System number is the same on both the NetLinx  
Workspace window and the System Connection page on the Modero  
panel.  
• Verify you have entered the proper NetLinx Master IP and connection  
methods into the Master Connection section of the System  
Connection page.  
My Modero panel can’t obtain a  
DHCP Address  
In requesting a DHCP Address, the DHCP Server can take up to a few  
minutes to provide the address.  
• Verify there is an active Ethernet connection attached to the rear of  
the Modero before beginning these procedures.  
• Select Diagnostics > Network Address, from the Main menu and  
verify the System number.  
• If the IP Address field is still empty, give the Modero a few minutes to  
negotiate a DHCP Address and try again.  
My NXT-BP battery pack is  
blinking when I check the battery  
life indicator.  
• A blinking battery life LED indicates that there is less than 10% power  
charge remaining on the battery.  
• It is recommended that you fully charge the battery either in the  
NXA-BASE/1 battery base or in the NXT-CHG battery charger.  
on page 25 for more information.  
My panel is not showing up in the If you a Virtual Master has already connected to the target panel, the  
Virtual Master’s System list of  
connected devices.  
G4 device retains the information of the previous Virtual Master System  
number.  
• Reboot the panel without the USB cable plugged into the panel.  
•Configure NetLinx Studio for a Virtual Master connection. Note the  
System Number used in the Edit Settings window.  
• Stop communication on the Virtual Master by going to Settings >  
Stop Communications.  
• Click Yes to stop communication.  
• Select the System Number (from the Online Tree tab) and use a right  
mouse click to select Refresh System. This re-establishes  
communication with the Virtual Master.  
• Plug-in the mini-USB cable into the corresponding port on the panel.  
• Wait a few seconds and refresh the system. This re-establishes  
communication with the Virtual Master. The panel should now  
appear in the list of available devices.  
164  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Information (Cont.)  
Symptom  
Solution  
My Connection Status button isn’t "USB Connecting" is displayed when the panel is trying to establish  
blinking and it says the USB is  
connecting.  
USB communication with the PC (either within the NetLinx Studio or  
TPDesign4 applications).  
• Remove the USB connector from the panel and close any AMX  
applications.  
• Reboot the panel.  
• Launch the AMX application and attempt reconnect to the panel.  
• If using Studio for Virtual Master communication, establish a Virtual  
Master connection, verify the correct System number, stop  
communication with the Virtual Master, and then re-establish  
communication by refreshing the system.  
• After the panel powers-up, reconnect the USB connector to the panel.  
• Verify that you have a valid USB connection from within your System  
Tray.  
My on-screen mouse cursor  
doesn’t appear.  
• The USB connections are not detected until after the particular USB  
connection plugged into the corresponding port on the panel and  
power is cycled to the panel.  
Calibration is not working.  
• After the Modero touch panel has been updated with a new firmware  
kit (downloaded to the panel through NetLinx Studio), the calibration  
could need to be reset.  
• Cycling power to the panel should provide a baseline calibration for  
the particular touch panel. Proceed to the Calibration page and reset  
the on-screen calibration.  
Panel doesn’t respond to my  
touches  
• The protective cover acts to press on the entire LCD and makes  
calibration difficult because the user can’t calibrate on specific  
crosshairs when the sheet is pressing on the whole LCD.  
• Verify that the protective laminate coating on the LCD is removed  
before beginning any calibration process.  
There is a crawling, dashed line on • On some units at some resolutions, there are wavy lines across the  
the left border of the graphics.  
entire screen. This has been seen on middle resolutions and is  
referred to as the "Mid Range Fallout" problem.  
• This is due to the graphics controller settings in the firmware.  
• Update to the latest v2.XX.XX firmware.  
• Visit the www.amx.com > Tech Center > Downloadable Files >  
Firmware Files > Modero panels. Then Download the KIT file to  
your computer.  
I was using the power from  
Modero battery bases can not be "hot-swapped" or replaced without  
PSN4.4, and when I connected my powering down the Modero and removing the PSN4.4 connector.  
NXA-BASE/1 battery base to the  
active panel, my screen went  
blank.  
• If you are currently using a direct power connection to the panel and  
then wish to connect an NXA-BASE/1.  
- First, power-down the panel and detach the rear power connection.  
Then, remove any batteries from within the NXA-BASE/1 and  
connect the battery base to the underside of the panel.  
- After connecting the base to the un-powered panel, then run power  
to the panel by either reconnecting the power cable to the rear of  
the panel or inserting the NXT-BP batteries into the NXA-BASE/1.  
Panel section on page 24 for more information.  
165  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Information (Cont.)  
Symptom  
Solution  
I can’t seem to completely charge NXT-BP batteries can be charged from either an external NXT-CHG  
my battery from within an  
NXA-BASE/1 connected to a  
powered panel.  
battery charger or from within the NXA-BASE/1 located below an NXT  
panel.  
• The NXA-BASE/1 Battery base should be updated with the latest  
firmware (part of the Modero firmware KIT file) from www.amx.com.  
• The base can only charge the battery while the NXT panel is in Sleep  
Mode. If the panel parameters are set to their highest values, the  
priority for the power draw becomes the active panel functions and  
no power is routed to the base for charging.  
• Adjust the Display Timeout value to allow the panel to commence the  
Sleep Mode and begin charging batteries within the base (drawing  
power from a PSN4.4).  
• Refer to the Battery Base Page section on page 95 for more  
information.  
My WEP doesn’t seem to be  
working.  
• WEP will not work unless the same default key is set on both the  
panel and the Access Point.  
• For example: if you had your access point set to default key 4 (which  
was 01:02:03:04:05) you must also set the Modero’s panel key 4 to  
01:02:03:04:05.  
NetLinx Studio only detects one of Each Master is give a Device Address of 00000.  
my connected Masters.  
• Only one Master can be assigned to a particular System number. If  
you want to work with multiple Masters, open different instances of  
NetLinx Studio and assign each Master its own System value.  
• Example: a site has an NXC-ME260/64 and an NI-4000. In order to  
work with both units. The ME260/64 can be assigned System #1 and  
the NI-4000 can then be assigned System #2 using two open  
sessions of NetLinx Studio 2.3.  
I can’t seem to connect to a  
NetLinx Master using my  
NetLinx Studio 2.3.  
• From the Settings > Master Comm Settings > Communication  
Settings > Settings (for TCP/IP), uncheck the "Automatically Ping  
the Master Controller to ensure availability".  
• The pinging is to determine if the Master is available, and to reply with  
a connection failure instantly if it is not. Without using the ping  
feature, you will still attempt to make a connection, but a failure will  
take longer to be recognized. Some firewalls and networks do not  
allow pinging, though, and the ping will then always result in a failure.  
• When connecting to a NetLinx Master controller via TCP/IP, the  
program will first try to ping the controller before attempting a  
connection. Pinging a device is relatively fast and will determine if the  
device is off-line, or if the TCP/IP address that was entered was  
incorrect. If you decide NOT to ping for availability and the controller  
is off-line, or you have an incorrect TCP/IP address, the program will  
try for 30-45 seconds to establish a connection.  
Note: If you are trying to connect to a master controller that is behind a  
firewall, you may have to uncheck this option. Most firewalls will not  
allow ping requests to pass through for security reasons.  
166  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Information (Cont.)  
Symptom  
Solution  
I have more that one Modero panel Multiple NetLinx Compatible devices (such as Modero panels) can be  
connected to my System Master  
and only one shows up.  
associated for use with a single Master. Each Modero panel comes  
with a defaulted Device Number value of 10001. When using multiple  
panels, it can become very easy to overlook the need to assign  
different Device Number values to each panel.  
• Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to  
open the Setup page.  
• Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the  
panel page), enter 1988 into the on-screen Keypad’s password field,  
and press Done when finished.  
• Enter a Device Number value for the panel into the Device Number  
Keypad. The default is 10001 and the range is from 1 - 32000.  
After downloading a panel file or  
firmware to a G4 device, the panel  
behaves strangely.  
Symptoms include:  
• Having to repeat the download.  
• Inability to make further downloads to the panel. May get "directory"  
errors, "graphics hierarchy" errors, etc.… indicating problems with  
the Compact Flash.  
• Panel will not boot, or gets stuck on "AMX" splash screen.  
• Other problems also started after downloading to a new panel or a  
panel with a TPD4 file that takes up a considerable amount of the  
available Compact Flash.  
Cause:  
• If the G4 device already contains a large enough file, subsequent  
downloads will take up more space than is available and could often  
corrupt the Compact Flash. The demo file that typically ships with G4  
panels is one such file.  
Solution:  
• DO NOT download TPD4 files (of large size) over the demo pages, or  
any other large TPD4 file.  
• First download a small blank one page file to the G4 panel using the  
Normal Transfer option to send/download the page. Reboot the  
device, then do your regular file or firmware download.  
My NXA-BASE/1 Battery Base isn’t The battery base CAN NOT be "hot swapped". This swapping  
being recognized by the NXT  
touch panel.  
occurs when an NXT panel is currently being powered by a PSN4.4  
and then is connected to a battery base containing NXT-BP batteries.  
Introducing a new power source onto an existing configuration can  
damage the NXA-BASE.  
Solution:  
If your base is not being recognized by the touch panel but is still  
providing power:  
• Launch the latest NetLinx Studio.  
• Refresh the particular System from within the OnLine Tree tab.  
• Identify the NXT panel using the battery base.  
• From the Main menu go to Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to  
NetLinx Device.  
• Locate and select the 2255_XXX_v2_00 KIT file for the battery base.  
• Enter the Device and System values, verify the method of  
communication (IP recommended).  
• Click Send to reload the new base KIT file onto the NXA-BASE/1.  
If this above steps do not cause the base to be recognized by the NXT  
touch panel on the Setup page, contact AMX Technical Support for  
further assistance.  
167  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Troubleshooting  
168  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs/Joysticks  
Text formatting codes for bargraphs provide a mechanism to allow a portion of a bargraphs text to  
be dynamically provided information about the current status of the level (multistate and  
traditional). These codes would be entered into the text field along with any other text.  
The following is a code list used for bargraphs:  
Bargraph Text Code Inputs  
Code  
Bargraph  
Multi-State Bargraph  
$P  
Display the current percentage of the  
bargraph (derived from the Adjusted  
Level Value as it falls between the  
Range Values)  
Display the current percentage of the  
bargraph (derived from the Adjusted  
Level Value as it falls between the  
Range Values)  
$V  
$L  
$H  
$S  
$A  
Raw Level Value  
Range Low Value  
Range High Value  
N/A  
Raw Level Value  
Range Low Value  
Range High Value  
Current State  
Adjusted Level Value (Range Low Value Adjusted Level Value (Range Low Value  
subtracted from the Raw Level Value)  
subtracted from the Raw Level Value)  
$R  
$$  
Low Range subtracted from the High  
Range  
Low Range subtracted from the High  
Range  
Dollar sign  
Dollar sign  
Buy changing the text on a button (via a VT command) you can modify the codes on a button.  
When one of the Text Formatting Codes is encountered by the firmware it is replaced with the  
correct value. These values are derived from the following operations:  
Formatting Code Operations  
Code  
$P  
Operation  
(Current Value - Range Low Value / Range High Value - Range Low Value) x 100  
Current Level Value  
$V  
$L  
Range Low Value  
$H  
$S  
Range High Value  
Current State (if regular bargraph then resolves to nothing)  
Current Value - Range Low Value  
$A  
$R  
Range High Value - Range Low Value  
Given a current raw level value of 532, a range low value of 500 and a high range value of 600 the  
following text formatting codes would yield the following strings as shown in the table below:  
Example  
Format  
Display  
$P%  
32%  
$A out of $R  
$A of 0 - $R  
$V of $L - $H  
32 out of 100  
32 of 0 - 100  
532 of 500 - 600  
169  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Appendix  
Text Area Input Masking  
Text Area Input Masking can be used to limit the allowed/correct characters that are entered into a  
text area. For example, in working with a zip code, a user could limit the entry to a max length of  
only 5 characters but, with input masking, you could limit them to 5 mandatory numerical digits  
and 4 optional numerical digits. A possible use for this feature is to enter information into form  
fields. The purpose of this feature is to:  
• Force you to use correct type of characters (i.e. numbers vs. characters)  
• Limit the number of characters in a text area  
• Suggest proper format with fixed characters  
• Right to Left  
• Required or Optional  
• Change/Force a Case  
• Create multiple logical fields  
• Specify range of characters/number for each field  
With this feature, it is NOT necessary to:  
• Limit you to a choice of selections  
• Handle complex input tasks such as names, days of the weeks or months by name  
• Perform complex validation such as Subnet Mask validation  
Input mask character types  
These character types define what information is allowed to be entered in any specific instance. The  
following table lists what characters in an input mask will define what characters are allowed in any  
given position.  
Character Types  
Character  
Masking Rule  
0
9
#
L
?
A
a
&
C
Digit (0 to 9, entry required, plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed)  
Digit or space (entry not required, plus and minus signs not allowed)  
Digit or space (entry not required; plus and minus signs allowed)  
Letter (A to Z, entry required)  
Letter (A to Z, entry optional)  
Letter or digit (entry required)  
Letter or digit (entry optional)  
Any character or a space (entry required)  
Any character or a space (entry optional)  
The number of the above characters used determines the length of the input masking  
box. Example: 0000 requires an entry, requires digits to be used, and allows only 4  
characters to be entered/used.  
Refer to the following Send Commands for more detailed information:  
^BIM- Sets the input mask for the specified addresses. (see the ^BIM section on  
^BMFsubcommand %MK - sets the input mask of a text area (see the  
170  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
     
Appendix  
Input mask ranges  
These ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric value for a field. Only  
one range is allowed per field. Using a range implies a numeric entry ONLY.  
Input Mask Ranges  
Character  
Meaning  
[
]
|
Start range  
End range  
Range Separator  
An example from the above table:  
[0|255] This allows a user to enter a value from 0 to 255.  
Input mask next field characters  
These characters allow you to specify a list of characters that cause the keyboard to move the focus  
to the next field when pressed instead of inserting the text into the text area.  
Input Mask Next Field Char  
Character  
Meaning  
{
}
Start Next Field List  
End Next Field List  
An example from the above table:  
{.} or {:} or {.:} Tells the system that after a user hits any of these keys, proceed to the  
next text area input box.  
Input mask operations  
Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in the following way:  
Input Mask Operators  
Character  
Meaning  
<
>
^
Forces all characters to be converted to lowercase  
Forces all characters to be converted to uppercase  
Sets the overflow flag for this field  
Input mask literals  
To define a literal character, enter any character, other than those shown in the above table  
(including spaces, and symbols). A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows it to be  
displayed as the literal character. For example, \A is displayed just as the letter A. To define one of  
the following characters as a literal character, precede that character with a back-slash. Text entry  
operation using Input Masks  
A keyboard entry using normal text entry is straightforward. However, once an input mask is  
applied, the behavior of the keyboard needs to change to accommodate the input mask's  
requirement. When working with masks, any literal characters in the mask will be "skipped" by any  
cursor movement including cursor keys, backspace, and delete.  
171  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
       
Appendix  
When operating with a mask, the mask should be displayed with placeholders. The "-" character  
should display where you should enter a character. The arrow keys will move between the "-"  
characters and allow you to replace them. The text entry code operates as if it is in the overwrite  
mode. If the cursor is positioned on a character already entered and you type in a new (and valid)  
character, the new character replace the old character. There is no shifting of characters.  
When working with ranges specified by the [] mask, the keyboard allows you to enter a number  
between the values listed in the ranges. If a user enters a value that is larger than the max, the  
maximum number of right-most characters is used to create a new, acceptable value.  
Example 1: If you type "125" into a field accepting 0-100, then the values displayed will  
be "1", "12", "25".  
Example2: If the max for the filed was 20, then the values displayed will  
be "1", "12", "5".  
When data overflows from a numerical field, the overflow value is added to the previous field on  
the chain, if the overflow character was specified. In the above example, if the overflow flag was  
set, the first example will place the "1" into the previous logical field and the second example will  
place "12" in the previous logical field. If the overflow filed already contains a value, the new value  
will be inserted to the right of the current characters and the overflow field will be evaluated.  
Overflow continues to work until a filed with no overflow value is set or there are no more fields  
left (i.e. reached first field).  
If a character is typed and that characters appear in the Next Field list, the keyboard should move  
the focus to the next field. For example, when entering time, a ":" is used as a next field character.  
If you hit "1:2", the 1 is entered in the current field (hours) and then the focus is moved to the next  
field and 2 is entered in that field.  
When entering time in a 12-hour format, entry of AM and PM is required. Instead of adding  
AM/PM to the input mask specification, the AM/PM should be handled within the NetLinx code.  
This allows a programmer to show/hide and provide discrete feedback for AM and PM.  
Input mask output examples  
The following are some common input masking examples:  
Output Examples  
Common Name  
IP Address Quad  
Hour  
Input Mask  
[0|255]{.}  
Input  
Any value from 0 to 255  
Any value from 1 to 12  
Any value from 0 to 59  
Any value from 0 to 29  
(555) 555-5555  
[1|12]{:}  
Minute/Second  
Frames  
[0|59]{:}  
[0|29]{:}  
Phone Numbers  
Zip Code  
(999) 000-0000  
00000-9999  
75082-4567  
172  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
 
Appendix  
URL Resources  
A URL can be broken into several parts. For example: the URL http://www.amx.com/company-  
info-home.asp. This URL indicates that the protocol in use is http (HyperText Transport Protocol)  
and that the information resides on a host machine named www.amx.com. The image on that host  
machine is given an assignment (by the program) name of company-info-home.asp (Active Server  
Page).  
The exact meaning of this name on the host machine is both protocol dependent and host  
dependent. The information normally resides in a file, but it could be generated dynamically. This  
component of the URL is called the file component, even though the information is not necessarily  
in a file.  
A URL can optionally specify a port, which is the port number to which the TCP connection is  
made on the remote host machine. If the port is not specified, the default port for the protocol is  
used instead. For example, the default port for http is 80. An alternative port could be specified as:  
http://www.amx.com:8080/company-info-home.asp.  
Any legal HTTP syntax can be used.  
Special escape sequences  
The system has only a limited knowledge of URL formats in that it transparently passes the URL  
information onto the server for translation. A user can then pass any parameters to the server side  
programs such as CGI scripts or active server pages. However; the system will parse the URL  
looking for special escape codes. When it finds an escape code it replaces that code with a  
particular piece of panel, button, or state information.  
For example, "http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=$DV" would become "http://www.amx.com/  
img.asp?device=10001". Other used escape sequences include:  
Escape Sequences  
Sequence  
$DV  
$SY  
$IP  
Panel Information  
Device Number  
System Number  
IP Address  
$HN  
$MC  
$ID  
Host Name  
Mac Address  
Neuron ID  
$PX  
$PY  
$BX  
$BY  
$BN  
$ST  
X Resolution of current panel mode/file  
Y Resolution of current panel mode/file  
X Resolution of current button  
Y Resolution of current button  
Name of button  
Current state  
$AC  
$AP  
$CC  
Address Code  
Address Port  
Channel Code  
173  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
   
Appendix  
Escape Sequences (Cont.)  
Sequence  
$CP  
Panel Information  
Channel Port  
Level Code  
Level Port  
$LC  
$LP  
174  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
Appendix  
175  
7" Widescreen Modero Touch Panels  
AMX reserves the right to alter specifications without notice at any time.  
ARGENTINA • AUSTRALIA • BELGIUM • BRAZIL • CANADA • CHINA • ENGLAND • FRANCE • GERMANY • GREECE • HONG KONG • INDIA • INDONESIA • ITALY • JAPAN  
LEBANON  
ATLANTA  
MALAYSIA  
MEXICO  
NETHERLANDS  
NEW ZEALAND  
DENVER  
PHILIPPINES  
PORTUGAL  
RUSSIA  
SINGAPORE  
SPAIN  
SWITZERLAND  
PHOENIX  
THAILAND  
TURKEY  
USA  
BOSTON CHICAGO  
CLEVELAND DALLAS  
INDIANAPOLIS  
LOS ANGELES  
MINNEAPOLIS  
PHILADELPHIA  
PORTLAND  
SPOKANE  
TAMPA  
3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX 75082 USA • 800.222.0193 • 469.624.8000 • 469-624-7153 fax • 800.932.6993 technical support • www.amx.com  

Alphasonik COMPONENT SPEAKER SYSTEM PCZ50E User Manual
Alpine 68 21627Z10 A User Manual
Barco Car Video System 1219 User Manual
Best Buy RF QX4 User Manual
Blaupunkt CASABLANCA RCM 85 User Manual
FOCUS Enhancements FireStore FS 3 User Manual
Hasbro Car Stereo System T1 60C User Manual
Hitachi VM E110A User Manual
JBL GTO426 User Manual
JVC Everio GZ MG55U User Manual